Anda di halaman 1dari 302

RH2288H V3 Server

V100R003

User Guide

Issue 18
Date 2017-08-23

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2017. All rights reserved.
No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written
consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Trademarks and Permissions

and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective
holders.

Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the
customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the
purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information,
and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or
representations of any kind, either express or implied.

The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.


Address: Huawei Industrial Base
Bantian, Longgang
Shenzhen 518129
People's Republic of China

Website: http://e.huawei.com

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential i


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide About This Document

About This Document

Intended Audience
This document describes the appearance, features, and specifications of the RH2288H V3 and
explains how to install and remove the server and its parts, power on and off, configure, and
troubleshoot the server.

Read this document before operating the RH2288H V3.

This document is intended for:

l Technical support engineers


l Maintenance engineers

Symbol Conventions
The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Symbol Description

Indicates an imminently hazardous situation


which, if not avoided, will result in death or
serious injury.

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation


which, if not avoided, could result in death
or serious injury.

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation


which, if not avoided, may result in minor
or moderate injury.

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation


which, if not avoided, could result in
equipment damage, data loss, performance
deterioration, or unanticipated results.
NOTICE is used to address practices not
related to personal injury.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential ii


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide About This Document

Symbol Description

Calls attention to important information,


best practices, and tips.
NOTE is used to address information not
related to personal injury, equipment
damage, and environment deterioration.

Change History
Changes between document issues are cumulative. The latest document issue contains all
changes made in previous issues.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23)
This issue is the 18th official release.

Issue 17 (2017-08-15)
Mode Change Description

Modified Optimized chapters about parts replacement. For details, see 7


Replacing Parts.

Issue 16 (2017-07-20)
Mode Change Description

New Added the description about 128 GB DIMMs. For details, see 2.5
Physical Structure and 2.11 Product Specifications.

Issue 15 (2017-06-20)
Mode Change Description

New Added internal cable BOMs. For details, see 2.7 Internal Cabling.

Issue 14 (2017-05-10)
Mode Change Description

Modified Modified the mainboard layout description. For details, see 2.6
Mainboard Layout.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential iii


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide About This Document

Issue 13 (2017-04-05)
Mode Change Description

Modified Modified front bezel description. For details, see 7.3 Removing the
Front Bezel and 7.4 (Optional) Installing the Front Bezel.

Issue 12 (2017-03-03)
Mode Change Description

Modified Modified the configuration description. For details, see 2.1


Introduction.

Issue 11 (2017-01-24)
Mode Change Description

Modified Added description about replacing the front bezel during hard disk
replacement. For details, see 7.5 Removing a Hard Disk and 7.6
Installing a Hard Disk.

Issue 10 (2016-11-29)
Mode Change Description

New Added information about CPU installation tool. For details, see 7.37
Removing a CPU and 7.38 Installing a CPU.
Added description about the server configuration with 12 NVMe
PCIe SSDs. For details, see 2 Overview.

Modified Modified the indicator status description of the NVMe PCIe SSD
installation. For details, see 7.8 Installing an NVMe PCIe SSD.

Issue 09 (2016-10-10)
Mode Change Description

Modified Modified the disk installation direction for servers that support 8 x
2.5", 24 x *2.5", or 25 x 2.5" hard disks. For details, see 2.2
Appearance.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential iv


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide About This Document

Issue 08 (2016-07-30)
Mode Change Description

New Added security description. For details, see 1 Safety Instructions.


Added the description of the Software and Configuration Utility. For
details, see 6 Software and Configuration Utility.

Issue 07 (2016-03-30)
Mode Change Description

New Added the procedures for removing and installing an NVMe PCIe
SSD. For details, see 7.7 Removing an NVMe PCIe SSD and 7.8
Installing an NVMe PCIe SSD.
Added the procedures for removing and installing an M.2 SATA SSD
card. For details, see 7.63 Removing an M.2 SATA SSD Card and
7.64 Installing an M.2 SATA SSD Card.

Issue 06 (2015-11-06)
Mode Change Description

New Added the procedure for operating the front bezel. For details, see 7.3
Removing the Front Bezel and 7.4 (Optional) Installing the Front
Bezel.
Added internal cabling. For details, see 2.7 Internal Cabling.

Modified Modified the mainboard layout description. For details, see 2.6
Mainboard Layout.

Issue 05 (2015-06-10)
Mode Change Description

New Added the procedure for removing the RH2288H V3 installed on the
holding rails. For details, see 7.11 Removing the Chassis Cover.

Issue 04 (2015-03-27)
Mode Change Description

New Added product specifications. For details, see 2.11 Product


Specifications.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential v


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide About This Document

Issue 03 (2014-12-30)
Mode Change Description

Modified Modified the product name.

Issue 02 (2014-12-10)
Mode Change Description

New Added the guide rail requirements on the chassis. For details, see 2.12
Physical Specifications.

Issue 01 (2014-08-30)
This issue is the first official release.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential vi


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide Contents

Contents

About This Document.....................................................................................................................ii


1 Safety Instructions.........................................................................................................................1
2 Overview......................................................................................................................................... 5
2.1 Introduction.................................................................................................................................................................... 6
2.2 Appearance..................................................................................................................................................................... 7
2.3 Ports.............................................................................................................................................................................. 17
2.4 Indicators and Buttons.................................................................................................................................................. 18
2.5 Physical Structure......................................................................................................................................................... 23
2.6 Mainboard Layout........................................................................................................................................................ 28
2.7 Internal Cabling............................................................................................................................................................ 30
2.7.1 Internal Cabling for an M.2 SSD Riser Card.............................................................................................................30
2.7.2 Internal Cabling for a Server with Eight 2.5-Inch Hard Disks.................................................................................. 32
2.7.3 Internal Cabling for a Server with Eight 3.5-Inch Hard Disks.................................................................................. 33
2.7.4 Internal Cabling for 12-Disk Configuration.............................................................................................................. 35
2.7.5 Internal Cabling for 24-Disk Configuration.............................................................................................................. 40
2.7.6 Internal Cabling for 25-Disk Configuration.............................................................................................................. 46
2.8 Logical Structure.......................................................................................................................................................... 48
2.9 RAS Features................................................................................................................................................................ 48
2.10 Software and Hardware Compatibility....................................................................................................................... 50
2.11 Product Specifications................................................................................................................................................ 51
2.12 Physical Specifications............................................................................................................................................... 56

3 Installing and Removing an RH2288H V3............................................................................. 60


3.1 Installation Overview................................................................................................................................................... 61
3.2 Unpacking the Chassis..................................................................................................................................................62
3.3 Installing a Server......................................................................................................................................................... 62
3.3.1 Installing a Server on L-Shaped Guide Rails............................................................................................................ 63
3.3.2 Installing a Server on Adjustable Guide Rails...........................................................................................................66
3.3.3 Installing the RH2288H V3 on Holding Rails...........................................................................................................67
3.4 Connecting External Cables......................................................................................................................................... 71
3.4.1 Connecting Cables to a Mouse, Keyboard, and VGA Port....................................................................................... 71
3.4.2 Connecting a Network Cable.....................................................................................................................................72
3.4.3 Connecting a Cable to a 10GE Port...........................................................................................................................74

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential vii


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide Contents

3.4.4 Connecting a 56G IB Cable.......................................................................................................................................77


3.4.5 Connecting a USB Device......................................................................................................................................... 79
3.4.6 Connecting a Serial Cable......................................................................................................................................... 80
3.4.7 Connecting a Power Cable........................................................................................................................................ 81
3.4.8 Laying Out Cables..................................................................................................................................................... 83
3.4.9 Verifying Cable Connections.....................................................................................................................................84
3.5 Removing the RH2288H V3........................................................................................................................................ 85

4 Powering On and Off the Server.............................................................................................. 87


4.1 Powering On the Server................................................................................................................................................88
4.2 Powering Off the Server............................................................................................................................................... 89

5 Configuring the RH2288H V3................................................................................................... 92


5.1 Default Information...................................................................................................................................................... 93
5.2 Configuration Process...................................................................................................................................................93
5.3 Checking the RH2288H V3..........................................................................................................................................95
5.4 Configuring RAID........................................................................................................................................................ 99
5.5 Configuring the BIOS.................................................................................................................................................100
5.6 Changing an iBMC User Password............................................................................................................................ 107
5.7 Setting the Management Network Port IP Address....................................................................................................108
5.8 Installing an OS.......................................................................................................................................................... 112
5.9 (Optional) Configuring the Boot from iSCSI Function for an SP230 NIC................................................................ 112

6 Software and Configuration Utility.......................................................................................114


6.1 BIOS........................................................................................................................................................................... 115
6.2 iBMC.......................................................................................................................................................................... 115
6.3 Upgrading Software....................................................................................................................................................116

7 Replacing Parts...........................................................................................................................119
7.1 Replaceable Parts........................................................................................................................................................122
7.2 Tool Preparations........................................................................................................................................................ 122
7.3 Removing the Front Bezel.......................................................................................................................................... 123
7.4 (Optional) Installing the Front Bezel..........................................................................................................................124
7.5 Removing a Hard Disk............................................................................................................................................... 127
7.6 Installing a Hard Disk.................................................................................................................................................129
7.7 Removing an NVMe PCIe SSD................................................................................................................................. 130
7.8 Installing an NVMe PCIe SSD................................................................................................................................... 135
7.9 Removing a PSU........................................................................................................................................................ 138
7.9.1 Removing an AC PSU............................................................................................................................................. 138
7.9.2 Removing a DC PSU............................................................................................................................................... 140
7.10 Installing a PSU........................................................................................................................................................ 142
7.10.1 Installing an AC PSU............................................................................................................................................ 142
7.10.2 Installing a DC PSU.............................................................................................................................................. 143
7.11 Removing the Chassis Cover....................................................................................................................................145
7.12 Installing the Chassis Cover..................................................................................................................................... 146

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential viii


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide Contents

7.13 Removing the Air Duct.............................................................................................................................................147


7.14 Installing the Air Duct.............................................................................................................................................. 149
7.15 Removing a Fan Module.......................................................................................................................................... 150
7.16 Installing a Fan Module............................................................................................................................................ 151
7.17 Removing an Internal Cable..................................................................................................................................... 153
7.18 Installing an Internal Cable.......................................................................................................................................155
7.19 Removing the Riser Card......................................................................................................................................... 156
7.20 Installing a Riser Card.............................................................................................................................................. 158
7.21 Removing a PCIe Card............................................................................................................................................. 160
7.21.1 Removing a PCIe Card from a Riser Card............................................................................................................ 160
7.21.2 Removing a PCIe Card from the Mainboard.........................................................................................................161
7.22 Installing a PCIe Card...............................................................................................................................................162
7.22.1 Installing a PCIe Card on the Riser Card.............................................................................................................. 163
7.22.2 Installing a PCIe Card on the Mainboard.............................................................................................................. 165
7.23 Removing the TPM.................................................................................................................................................. 166
7.24 Installing the TPM.................................................................................................................................................... 168
7.25 Removing the DVD-ROM Drive............................................................................................................................. 169
7.26 Installing the DVD-ROM Drive............................................................................................................................... 173
7.27 Removing the Internal USB Flash Drive..................................................................................................................176
7.28 Installing the Internal USB Flash Drive................................................................................................................... 178
7.29 Removing the System Battery.................................................................................................................................. 180
7.30 Installing the System Battery....................................................................................................................................181
7.31 Removing the RAID Controller Card from the Mainboard..................................................................................... 182
7.32 Installing the RAID Controller Card on the Mainboard...........................................................................................184
7.33 Removing the Standard RAID Controller Card....................................................................................................... 186
7.34 Installing the Standard RAID Controller Card......................................................................................................... 187
7.35 Removing the Supercapacitor...................................................................................................................................188
7.36 Installing the Supercapacitor.................................................................................................................................... 190
7.37 Removing a CPU...................................................................................................................................................... 191
7.38 Installing a CPU........................................................................................................................................................196
7.39 Removing a DIMM.................................................................................................................................................. 201
7.40 Installing a DIMM.................................................................................................................................................... 202
7.41 Removing the Mainboard......................................................................................................................................... 205
7.42 Installing the Mainboard...........................................................................................................................................209
7.43 Removing the NIC....................................................................................................................................................213
7.44 Installing a NIC........................................................................................................................................................ 214
7.45 Removing the LCD...................................................................................................................................................215
7.46 Installing the LCD.................................................................................................................................................... 222
7.47 Removing a SATADOM...........................................................................................................................................227
7.48 Installing a SATADOM............................................................................................................................................ 229
7.49 Removing an SD Card.............................................................................................................................................. 230
7.50 Installing an SD Card............................................................................................................................................... 231

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential ix


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide Contents

7.51 Removing the Front Hard Disk Backplane...............................................................................................................232


7.52 Installing the Front Hard Disk Backplane................................................................................................................ 234
7.53 Removing the Rear Hard Disk Backplane................................................................................................................236
7.54 Installing the Rear Hard Disk Backplane................................................................................................................. 238
7.55 Removing the VGA Board....................................................................................................................................... 240
7.56 Installing the VGA Board.........................................................................................................................................245
7.57 Removing the PSU Backplane................................................................................................................................. 250
7.58 Installing the PSU Backplane................................................................................................................................... 251
7.59 Removing the Left Mounting Ear.............................................................................................................................252
7.60 Installing the Left Mounting Ear.............................................................................................................................. 253
7.61 Removing the Right Mounting Ear.......................................................................................................................... 255
7.62 Installing the Right Mounting Ear............................................................................................................................ 257
7.63 Removing an M.2 SATA SSD Card......................................................................................................................... 259
7.64 Installing an M.2 SATA SSD Card........................................................................................................................... 260

8 Troubleshooting Guide............................................................................................................ 263


9 Common Operations.................................................................................................................264
9.1 Querying the IP Address of the Management Network Port......................................................................................265
9.2 Logging In to the iBMC WebUI................................................................................................................................. 268
9.3 Logging In to the iBMC CLI...................................................................................................................................... 270
9.4 Logging In to a Server Using the Independent Remote Console............................................................................... 271
9.5 Logging In to the Remote Virtual Console.................................................................................................................278
9.6 Querying the Mapping Between NVMe PCIe SSD Drive Letters, Slot IDs, and Bus IDs in Linux......................... 280

10 How to Obtain Help................................................................................................................282


10.1 Preparing to Contact Huawei Technical Support......................................................................................................283
10.2 Collecting Fault Information.................................................................................................................................... 283
10.3 Preparing for Debugging.......................................................................................................................................... 283
10.4 Using Product Documentation..................................................................................................................................283
10.5 Obtaining Technical Support.................................................................................................................................... 283

A Appendix....................................................................................................................................285
A.1 Glossary..................................................................................................................................................................... 286
A.2 Acronyms and Abbreviations.................................................................................................................................... 287

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential x


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 1 Safety Instructions

1 Safety Instructions

General Instructions
l Comply with the local laws and regulations when installing the hardware. The safety
instructions in this document are only supplements to the local laws and regulations.
l The "CAUTION", "WARNING", and "DANGER" notices in this document are only
supplements to the safety instructions in this document.
l To ensure personal and device safety, follow all safety instructions on device labels and
in this document when installing the hardware.
l Only personnel (such as electricians and electric pallet truck operators) who are certified
by the local government or official organizations are allowed to perform hardware
installation.
l The product is a Class A device. Operation of this product in a residential area is likely
to cause radio interference in which case users will be requested to correct the
interference by taking protective measures.

Personal Safety
Follow these precautions to ensure personal safety:
l Ensure that you are certified or authorized by Huawei to perform the hardware
installation.
l Immediately stop operations and report any problems that may cause injury to personnel
or damage to devices to a project supervisor and take protective measures.
l Do not perform operations including moving devices, installing cabinets, and installing
power cables on rainy days or during thunderstorms.
l Wear clean protective gloves, ESD clothing, a protective hat, and protective shoes, as
shown in Figure 1-1.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 1 Safety Instructions

Figure 1-1 Protective clothing

l Before carrying devices, observe the following:


Do not carry more than allowed by the local laws or regulations.
Arrange for enough personnel to carry the devices.
l Before touching devices, wear ESD clothing and ESD gloves (or wrist strap), and
remove electricity-conductive materials such as watches and jewelry, as shown in Figure
1-2.

Figure 1-2 Removing easily-conductive objects

Figure 1-3 shows how to wear an ESD wrist strap.


a. Put on the ESD wrist strap.
b. Fasten the buckle and ensure that the ESD wrist strap is in good contact with your
skin.
c. Insert the ground terminal of the ESD wrist strap into the jack on the grounded
cabinet or chassis.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 2


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 1 Safety Instructions

Figure 1-3 Wearing an ESD wrist strap

l Exercise caution when using tools to prevent injuries.


l If the position for installing the device is higher than your shoulders, use a stacker to lift
the device to prevent it from falling on top of you.
l High-voltage power supply provides power for device operation. Do not touch high-
voltage cables directly or through conductive materials. This may cause danger of
electrocution.
l Before powering on a device, ground it to prevent injuries.
l Do not use the ladder by yourself. Have someone else hold the ladder steady to prevent
accidents.
l Do not view the open optical port directly when installing, testing, or replacing optical
cables to prevent laser radiation from injuring your eyes.

Transportation Precautions
Improper transportation may damage equipment. Contact the manufacturer for precautions
before attempting transportation.
When transporting equipment, note the following:
l The logistics company engaged to transport the equipment must be reliable and comply
with international standards for transporting electronics. Ensure that the equipment being
transported is kept upright and avoid collision, damp conditions, corrosion, package
damage, and pollution.
l Transport the equipment in its original packaging.
l Package fragile parts such as optical modules, PCIe SSDs, and GPUs separately from
bulky items such as chassis and blades.
l Power off all equipment before transportation. Do not transport hazardous materials.

Capacity Expansion Precautions


When expanding capacity, note the following:
l Use only genuine components that can be queried in the Huawei Server Compatibility
Checker.
l Only maintenance engineers authorized by Huawei are allowed to expand capacity.
Avoid physical damage caused by electrostatic discharge, collision, and scratches.
l Before expanding capacity, back up data and isolate the equipment from the network to
prevent data loss, service interruption, and network loops.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 3


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 1 Safety Instructions

l After expanding capacity, upgrade software to prevent software incompatibility with new
components.

Equipment Safety
Follow these precautions to ensure equipment safety:
l To ensure equipment and human safety, use the recommended power cables.
l Power cables can be used only for dedicated devices, and they cannot be used for any
other devices.
l Before touching devices, wear ESD clothing and gloves to avoid electrostatic damage.
l When moving devices, hold the handles or bottom of devices instead of the handles of
the installed modules (for example, a PSU, fan module, hard disk, or board).
l Exercise caution when using tools to avoid equipment damage.
l Connect the power cables to different power distribution units (PDUs) so that the PDUs
can supply power to the device in active/standby mode. This improves power supply
reliability.
l Before powering on a device, ground it to prevent device damage.

Maximum Load Carried by a Single Person

CAUTION
Comply with local regulations for the maximum load per person.

Table 1-1 shows the maximum load for an adult stipulated by the following organizations:

Table 1-1 Regulations on the maximum load per person at one time
Organization Name Weight (kg/lb)

European Committee for Standardization (CEN) 25/55.13

International Organization for Standardization (ISO) 25/55.13

National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH) 23/50.72

Health and Safety Executive (HSE) 25/55.13

General Administration of Quality Supervision, Inspection and l Male: 15/33.01


Quarantine of the People's Republic of China (AQSIQ) l Female: 10/22.05

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 2 Overview

2 Overview

About This Chapter

This topic describes the features of the RH2288H V3.


2.1 Introduction
2.2 Appearance
2.3 Ports
2.4 Indicators and Buttons
2.5 Physical Structure
2.6 Mainboard Layout
2.7 Internal Cabling
2.8 Logical Structure
2.9 RAS Features
2.10 Software and Hardware Compatibility
2.11 Product Specifications
2.12 Physical Specifications

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 5


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 2 Overview

2.1 Introduction
The RH2288H V3 (marked as H22H-03 on the nameplate) is a 2 U dual-socket rack server
launched by Huawei to meet customer requirements for the Internet, Internet data center
(IDC), cloud computing, enterprise market applications, and telecom service applications.

The RH2288H V3 features high-performance computing, large storage capacity, low power
consumption, high scalability and reliability. It supports virtualization, and is easy to manage
and deploy. It is ideal for basic enterprise applications, telecom services, storage services,
such as distributed storage, data mining, electronic albums, and videos.

Table 2-1 describes the configuration of the RH2288H V3.

Table 2-1 RH2288H V3 configurations


Configura Maximum Number of Front Hard Maximu Maximu Support
tion Disks m m PCH
Number Number Configu
Total Common NVMe of Rear of RAID ration[6]
Hard PCIe Commo Controll [7]
Disk[1][4] SSD[3][4] n Hard er
Disks[1] Cards[7]

8-disk 8[2] 8 - - 1 No
configurati
on 1

8-disk 8 8 - - 1 Yes
configurati
on 2

12-disk 12 12 - 4 1 No
configurati
on 1

12-disk 12 12 - - 1 No
configurati
on 2 8 (slots 4 (slots 8
07) 11)

12-disk 12 4 (slots 8 (slots 4 - 1 No


configurati 03) 11)
on 3
- 12

24-disk 24[2] 24 - - 3[5] No


configurati
on 1

25-disk 25[2] 25 - 3 1 No
configurati
on 1

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 6


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 2 Overview

NOTE

l [1]: Common hard disks include 2.5-inch or 3.5-inch SAS or SATA HDDs and 2.5-inch SSDs.
l [2]: The front hard disks of 8-disk configuration 1, 24-disk configuration 1, and 25-disk configuration

1 can only be 2.5-inch hard disks.


l [3]:
When NVMe PCIe SDDs are configured, related hardware, such as hard disk backplanes and riser
cards must be configured.
l [4]:Number of installed front hard disks = Number of installed front common hard disks + Number of
installed front NVMe PCIe SSDs.
The number of installed front hard disks on a server cannot be greater than the maximum number of front
hard disks. For example, 12-disk configuration 2 supports a maximum of 12 front hard disks. If four
front NVMe PCIe SSDs are installed, only a maximum of four eight common hard disks can be installed.
l [5]: For 24-disk configuration 1, a RAID controller card needs to be configured for every eight hard

disks.
l [6]:
The server where hard disks are connected through the Intel chipset (PCH) supports SATA disks only,
an optional softRAID license, and softRAID 0, 1, and 5. The server with softRAID configuration does not
support installation of a virtualization OS. If you have any doubts about the hard disk configuration,
contact your local Huawei sales representatives.
l [7]:
Hard disks can be managed by the RAID controller card or the PCH. You can select only one of the
two management mode.

Figure 2-1 shows the RH2288H V3 with 12 hard disks.

Figure 2-1 RH2288H V3

2.2 Appearance

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 7


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 2 Overview

Front Panel
Figure 2-2 shows the front panel of an RH2288H V3 with eight 2.5-inch hard disks.

Figure 2-2 Front panel of an RH2288H V3 with eight 2.5-inch hard disks

1 Fault diagnosis LED 2 Health indicator


3 UID button/indicator 4 Power button/indicator
5 VGA port 6 NMI button
7 Label (including the ESN label) 8 Built-in DVD drive or touchscreen LCD
diagnosis panel
9 Hard disks (numbered 0 to 7 from left to 10 USB 2.0 port
right)
11 Network port link status indicators 12 Hard disk fault indicator
(numbered 1 to 4 from top to bottom)
13 Hard disk activity indicator - -

Figure 2-3 shows the front panel of an RH2288H V3 with eight 3.5-inch hard disks.

Figure 2-3 Front panel of an RH2288H V3 with eight 3.5-inch hard disks

1 Fault diagnosis LED 2 Health indicator


3 UID button/indicator 4 Power button/indicator
5 VGA port 6 NMI button
7 Label (including the ESN label) 8 Built-in DVD drive or touchscreen LCD
diagnosis panel
9 Hard disks (numbered 0 to 7 from top to 10 Hard disk fault indicator
bottom and from left to right)
11 Hard disk activity indicator 12 USB 2.0 port
13 Network port link status indicators - -
(numbered 1 to 4 from top to bottom)

Figure 2-4 shows the front panel of an RH2288H V3 with twelve 3.5-inch hard disks.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 8


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 2 Overview

Figure 2-4 Front panel of an RH2288H V3 with twelve 3.5-inch hard disks

1 Fault diagnosis LED 2 Health indicator


3 UID button/indicator 4 Power button/indicator
5 Label (including the ESN label) 6 Hard disks (numbered 0 to 11 from top to
bottom and from left to right)
7 Hard disk fault indicator 8 Hard disk activity indicator
9 USB 2.0 port 10 Network port link status indicators (numbered 1
to 4 from top to bottom)

Figure 2-5 shows the front panel of an RH2288H V3 with twelve 3.5-inch hard disks,
including four NVMe PCIe SSDs.

Figure 2-5 Front panel of an RH2288H V3 with twelve 3.5-inch hard disks, including four
NVMe PCIe SSDs

1 Fault diagnosis LED 2 Health indicator


3 UID button/indicator 4 Power button/indicator
5 NVMe PCIe SSD yellow indicator 6 NVMe PCIe SSD green indicator
7 Label (including the ESN label) 8 NVMe PCIe SSDs (numbered 8 to 11 from left
to right and from top to bottom)
9 Hard disks (numbered 0 to 7 from top to 10 Hard disk fault indicator
bottom and from left to right)
11 Hard disk activity indicator 12 USB 2.0 port
13 Network port link status indicators - -
(numbered 1 to 4 from top to bottom)

Figure 2-5 shows the front panel of an RH2288H V3 with eight to twelve NVMe PCIe SSDs.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 9


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 2 Overview

Figure 2-6 Front panel of an RH2288H V3 with eight to twelve NVMe PCIe SSDs

1 Fault diagnosis LED 2 Health indicator


3 UID button/indicator 4 Power button/indicator
5 NVMe PCIe SSD yellow indicator 6 NVMe PCIe SSD green indicator
7 Label (including the ESN label) 8 NVMe PCIe SSDs (numbered 4 to 11 from top
to bottom and from left)
9 Hard disks (supporting SSDs, SAS 10 Hard disk fault indicator or NVMe PCIe SSD
HDDs, SATA HDDs, and NVMe PCIe yellow indicator
SSDs; numbered 0 to 3 from top to
bottom and from left to right)
11 Hard disk activity indicator or NVMe 12 USB 2.0 port
PCIe SSD green indicator
13 Network port link status indicators - -
(numbered 1 to 4 from top to bottom)

Figure 2-7 shows the front panel of an RH2288H V3 with twenty-five 2.5-inch hard disks.

Figure 2-7 Front panel of an RH2288H V3 with twenty-five 2.5-inch hard disks

1 Fault diagnosis LED 2 Health indicator


3 UID button/indicator 4 Power button/indicator
5 Label (including the ESN label) 6 Hard disks (numbered 0 to 24 from left to right)

7 USB 2.0 port 8 Network port link status indicators (numbered 1 to


4 from top to bottom)
9 Hard disk fault indicator 10 Hard disk activity indicator

Figure 2-8 shows the front panel of an RH2288H V3 with twenty-four 2.5-inch hard disks.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 10


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 2 Overview

Figure 2-8 Front panel of an RH2288H V3 with twenty-four 2.5-inch hard disks

1 Fault diagnosis LED 2 Health indicator


3 UID button/indicator 4 Power button/indicator
5 NMI button 6 VGA port
7 Label (including the ESN label) 8 Hard disks (numbered 0 to 23 from left to right)

9 USB 2.0 port 10 Network port link status indicators (numbered 1 to 4


from top to bottom)
11 Hard disk fault indicator 12 Hard disk activity indicator

Rear Panel
Figure 2-9 shows the rear panel of the RH2288H V3.

Figure 2-9 Rear panel of the RH2288H V3

1 PSU 2 PSU indicator


3 Power socket for a PSU 4 I/O module 2(providing slots 6 to 8 from top to
bottom) or NVMe PCIe SSD adapter
(corresponding to CPU 2, providing slots 6 and 7
from top to bottom)
5 Connection status indicator 6 Data transmission status indicator
7 Onboard PCIe slots (numbered 4 and 5 8 I/O module 1 (providing slots 1 to 3 from top to
from left to right) bottom)

9 LOM 10 UID indicator


11 USB 3.0 port 12 Mgmt management network port
13 VGA port 14 Serial port

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 11


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 2 Overview

NOTE

l Items 4 and 8 in Figure 2-9 can be equipped with riser cards, or rear 2.5-inch or 3.5-inch hard
disks (2.5-inch and 3.5-inch hard disks can be configured together).
l If the server is equipped with twelve 3.5-inch hard disks on the front, you can install a maximum
of four 3.5-inch or 2.5-inch hard disks on the rear. Both items 8 and 4 in Figure 2-9 can be
equipped with 2.5-inch and 3.5-inch hard disks.
l If the server is equipped with twenty-five 2.5-inch hard disks on the front, you can install a
maximum of three 3.5-inch or 2.5-inch hard disks on the rear. Item 8 in Figure 2-9 can be
equipped with two hard disks, and item 4 can be equipped with only one hard disk in the upper
position.
l If item 8 are equipped with two hard disks, the disks are numbered A0 and B0 from top to bottom.
If item 4 are equipped with two hard disks, the disks are numbered A1 and B1 from top to bottom.

LOMs
The RH2288H V3 supports the following models of LOMs:
l SM211: provides two GE electrical ports.
l SM210/SM212: provides four GE electrical ports.
l SM233: provides two 10GE electrical ports.
l SM231: provides two 10GE optical ports.
l SM252: provides one 56G IB optical port.
l SM251: provides two 56G IB optical ports.
NOTE
For details about LOMs supported by the RH2288H V3, see Huawei Server Compatibility Checker.

The following figures show LOM ports and indicators.


l Figure 2-10 SM211 ports and indicators

1 Data transmission status indicator 2 Connection status indicator

l Figure 2-11 SM210 or SM212 ports and indicators

1 Data transmission status indicator 2 Connection status indicator

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 12


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 2 Overview

l Figure 2-12 SM233 ports and indicators

1 Transmission rate indicator 2 Connection status indicator/Data transmission


status indicator

l Figure 2-13 SM231 ports and indicators

1 Data transmission status indicator 2 Connection status indicator

l Figure 2-14 SM252 port and indicators

1 Connection status indicator 2 Data transmission status indicator

l Figure 2-15 SM251 ports and indicators

1 Connection status indicator 2 Data transmission status indicator

PCIe Slot Layout


Figure 2-16 shows the PCIe slot layout of the RH2288H V3.

Figure 2-16 PCIe slot layout

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 13


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 2 Overview

PCIe Device
I/O module 1 provides slots 1 to 3, and I/O module 2 provides slots 6 to 8.
I/O module 1 and 2 supports 2-slot PCIe riser module or 3-slot PCIe riser module, but three
PCIe slots are always displayed on the panel.
l If I/O module 1 provides two PCIe slots, slot 3 is unavailable.
l If I/O module 2 provides two PCIe slots, slot 8 is unavailable.
Table 2-2 describes the mapping between PCIe devices and CPUs, and the PCIe
specifications of the RH2288H V3.
NOTE
The PCIe devices mapping to a vacant CPU socket are unavailable.

Table 2-2 PCIe device description


PCI C PCI Connector Bus Port ROO Device Slot Size
e P e Bandwidth Width Num T (B/D/F)
De U Sta ber PORT
vic nda (B/D/F
e rd )

Slot C PCI x16 x8 Port 00/02/ 03/00/0 Full-


1 P e 2C 2 height
U 3.0 full-length
1

Slot C PCI l 2-slot l 2-slot Port 00/03/ 04/00/0 Full-


2 P e PCIe PCIe 3A 0 height
U 3.0 riser riser full-length
1 module: module
x16 : x16
l 3-slot l 3-slot
PCIe PCIe
riser riser
module: module
x8 : x8

Slot C PCI x8 x8 Port 00/03/ 05/00/0 Full-


3 P e 3C 2 height
U 3.0 half-length
1

Slot C PCI x8 x8 Port 80/02/ 82/00/0 Half-


4 P e 2C 2 height
U 3.0 half-length
2

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 14


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 2 Overview

PCI C PCI Connector Bus Port ROO Device Slot Size


e P e Bandwidth Width Num T (B/D/F)
De U Sta ber PORT
vic nda (B/D/F
e rd )

Slot C PCI x8 x8 Port 80/02/ 81/00/0 Half-


5 P e 2A 0 height
U 3.0 half-length
2

Slot C PCI x16 x8 Port 80/01/ 83/00/0 Full-


6 P e 1A 0 height
U 3.0 full-length
2

Slot C PCI l 2-slot l 2-slot Port 80/03/ 84/00/0 Full-


7 P e PCIe PCIe 3A 0 height
U 3.0 riser riser full-length
2 module: module
x16 : x16
l 3-slot l 3-slot
PCIe PCIe
riser riser
module: module
x8 : x8

Slot C PCI x8 x8 Port 80/03/ 85/00/0 Full-


8 P e 3C 2 height
U 3.0 half-length
2

RAI C PCI x8 x8 Port 00/01/ 01/00/0


D P e 1A 0
cont U 3.0
roll 1
er
card

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 15


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 2 Overview

PCI C PCI Connector Bus Port ROO Device Slot Size


e P e Bandwidth Width Num T (B/D/F)
De U Sta ber PORT
vic nda (B/D/F
e rd )

NIC C PCI x8 x8 Port 00/02/ A NIC


P e 2A 0 with four
U 3.0 network
1 ports is
used as an
example.
The four
network
port
numbers
are as
follows:
l 02/00/0
l 02/00/1
l 02/00/2
l 02/00/3

Note 1: B/D/F, Bus/Device/Function Number.


Note 2: ROOT PORT (B/D/F) indicates the bus number of a CPU internal PCIe root port.
Device (B/D/F) indicates the bus number (displayed on the OS) of an onboard or external
PCIe port.
Note 3: The PCIe slots that support full-height full-length PCIe cards are backward
compatible with full-height half-length or half-height half-length PCIe cards.
Note 4: The PCIe slots with the bus width of PCIe x16 are backward compatible with PCIe
x8, PCIe x4, and PCIe x1 cards.
Note 5: The power supply capabilities of all slots support PCIe cards of 75 W. The power
of a PCIe card depends on its model. For details about the supported PCIe cards, see
Huawei Server Compatibility Checker. For PCIe cards out of the Huawei Server
Compatibility Checker, contact your local Huawei sales personnel.
Note 6: Table 2-2 lists the default values of B/D/F. If CPUs are not in full configuration or
a PCIe card with a PCI bridge is configured, the values of B/D/F may differ.
Note 7: For a server with four NVMe PCIe SSDs, a 2-slot riser module must be installed on
I/O module 2 and an NVMe PCIe SSD adapter can be installed only in slot 7.

PCIe GPU Configuration Rules


A GPU must be installed on a PCIe riser module.
l A 2-slot PCIe riser module supports a maximum of two single-slot PCIe x16 GPUs
(bandwidth of one GPU: x8) or one dual-slot PCIe x16 GPU.
l A 3-slot PCIe riser module does not support any GPU.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 16


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 2 Overview

ESNs
An Equipment Serial Number (ESN) is a string that uniquely identifies a server. An ESN is
required when you apply for technical support to Huawei.

Figure 2-17 shows the ESN format by using the example 2102310QPD10F3001263.

Figure 2-17 ESN example

No. Description

1 Indicates the ESN ID (two digits).

2 Indicates the material identification code (8


characters).

3 Indicates the vendor code (two characters).

4 Indicates the year and month (two


characters).

5 Indicates the serial number (six digits).

2.3 Ports
Table 2-3 and Table 2-4 describe the external ports on the RH2288H V3.

Table 2-3 Ports on the front panel


Port Type Quantity Description

Video graphics array DB15 1 The VGA port is used to


(VGA) port connect a terminal, such as a
monitor or KVM.

USB port USB 2.0 2 The USB port is connected


to a USB device.
NOTICE
Before connecting to an
external USB device, check
that the USB device operates
properly. A server may fail if it
is connected to an abnormal
USB device.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 17


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 2 Overview

Table 2-4 Ports on the rear panel


Port Type Quantity Description

VGA port DB15 1 The VGA port is used to


connect a terminal, such as a
monitor or KVM.

USB port USB 3.0 2 The USB port is connected


to a USB device.
NOTICE
Before connecting to an
external USB device, check
that the USB device operates
properly. A server may fail if it
is connected to an abnormal
USB device.
USB 3.0 is disabled by
default. You can enable it in
the BIOS. When you use the
VMware operating system
(OS), do not enable USB 3.0.
Otherwise, the keyboard and
mouse are unavailable.

Management Ethernet port 1 The 1000 Mbit/s Ethernet


network port port is used to manage the
(Mgmt) server.

Serial port DB9 1 This port complies with


RS232. The baud rate is
115200 bit/s.
The serial port is used as the
system serial port by
default. You can set it to the
iBMC serial port by using
the iBMC command. The
port is used for debugging.

Network port - - The port types and quantity


vary according to the
configured NIC.

2.4 Indicators and Buttons

Front Panel
You can observe the indicators to determine the status of the RH2288H V3.
Table 2-5 describes the indicators and buttons on the RH2288H V3 front panel.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 18


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 2 Overview

Table 2-5 Indicators and buttons on the front panel


Silk Screen Meaning State Description

Fault diagnosis l ---: The server is operating properly.


LED l Error code: A fault occurs in server hardware.
For details about error code, see HUAWEI
Rack Server Alarm Handling (iBMC).

Power button/ l Off: The server is not powered on.


indicator l Blinking yellow: iBMC is being started.
l Steady yellow: The system is in the standby
state.
l Steady green: The system is properly powered
on.
NOTE
l When the server is powered on, you can press this
button to shut down the OS.
l When the server is powered on, you can hold down
this button for 6 seconds to power off the server.
l When the server is ready to be powered on, you
can press this button to start the server.

UID button/ The UID button/indicator helps identify and


indicator locate a server in a rack. You can turn on or off
the UID indicator by manually pressing the UID
button or remotely running a command on the
iBMC CLI.
l Off: The server is not located.
l Steady blue: The server is located.
NOTE
l You can press this button to turn on or off the UID
indicator.
l You can press and hold down this button for 4 to 6
seconds to reset the iBMC.

Health indicator l Steady green: The server is operating


properly.
l Blinking red at 1 Hz: A major alarm is
generated.
l Blinking red at 5 Hz: A critical alarm is
generated.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 19


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 2 Overview

Silk Screen Meaning State Description

NMI button The NMI button triggers a server to generate a


non-maskable interrupt. You can press this button
or control it remotely through the iBMC WebUI.
NOTICE
l Click the NMI button only when the OS is
abnormal. Do not click this button when the server
is operating properly.
l Click the NMI button only for internal
commissioning. Before clicking this button, ensure
that the OS has the handler for NMI interrupt.
Otherwise, the OS may crash. Exercise caution
when clicking this button.

- Hard disk activity l Off: The hard disk is not detected or is faulty.
indicator l Blinking green: Data is being read from or
written to the hard disk, or synchronized
between hard disks.
l Steady green: The hard disk is inactive.

- Hard disk fault l Off: The hard disk is working properly.


indicator l Blinking yellow: The hard disk is located, or
rebuilding RAID.
l Steady yellow: The hard disk is faulty, or hard
disk members of the RAID array the hard disk
is in are abnormal.
NOTE
If the fault indicator is steady yellow, run related
commands to check the RAID status to determine
whether the RAID array status is abnormal or
whether the hard disk is faulty. For details about
command description, see HUAWEI V2&V3
Server RAID Controller Card User Guide.

Network port link The indicators show the status of each Ethernet
status indicators port on the NIC.
l Off: The port is not in use or faulty.
l Steady green: The port is properly connected.
NOTE
If the NIC provides two network ports, they correspond
to network port indicators 1 and 2 on the front panel.

Table 2-6 describes the NVMe PCIe SSD indicators on the RH2288H V3 front panel.

Table 2-6 NVMe PCIe SSD indicators


Green Indicator Yellow State Description
Indicator

Off Off The NVMe PCIe SSD cannot be detected.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 20


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 2 Overview

Green Indicator Yellow State Description


Indicator

Steady green Off The NVMe PCIe SSD is detected and working
properly.

Blinking green at Off Data access to the NVMe PCIe SSD is in


2 Hz progress.

Off Blinking yellow The NVMe PCIe SSD is in the hot swap process.
at 2 Hz

Off Blinking yellow The NVMe PCIe SSD completes the hot removal
at 0.5 Hz process and is removable.

Blinking green or Steady yellow The NVMe PCIe SSD is faulty.


off

Rear Panel
Table 2-7 describes the indicators on the RH2288H V3 rear panel.

Table 2-7 Indicators on the rear panel


Indicator State

Management Data l Off: No data is being transmitted.


network port transmission l Blinking yellow: Data is being transmitted.
status indicator

Connection status l Off: The network port is not connected.


indicator l Steady green: The network port is properly
connected.

UID indicator l Off: The server is not located.


l Steady blue: The server is located.

PSU indicator l Off: There is no AC power input; the input


overvoltage or undervoltage occurs and the
PSU is not detected; the PSU is abnormal.
l Steady green: Both the active output and the
standby output are normal.

Hard disk activity indicator l Off: The hard disk is not detected or is faulty.
l Blinking green: Data is being read from or
written to the hard disk, or synchronized
between hard disks.
l Steady green: The hard disk is inactive.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 21


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 2 Overview

Indicator State

Hard disk fault indicator l Off: The hard disk is working properly.
l Blinking yellow: The hard disk is located, or
rebuilding RAID.
l Steady yellow: The hard disk is faulty, or hard
disk members of the RAID array the hard disk
is in are abnormal.
NOTE
If the fault indicator is steady yellow, run related
commands to check the RAID status to determine
whether the RAID array status is abnormal or
whether the hard disk is faulty. For details about
command description, see HUAWEI V2&V3
Server RAID Controller Card User Guide.

Table 2-8 describes the indicators of LANs on motherboard (LOMs) on the RH2288H V3
rear panel.

Table 2-8 LOM indicators


LOM Type Indicator State Description

l LOM with two Data transmission l Off: No data is being transmitted.


GE electrical status indicator l Blinking yellow: Data is being transmitted.
ports
l LOM with Connection status l Off: The network port is not connected.
four GE indicator l Steady green: The network port is properly
electrical ports connected.
l LOM with two
10GE optical
ports

LOM with two Transmission rate l Off: The link rate is 10 Mbit/s or 100 Mbit/s.
10GE electrical indicator l Steady green: The link rate is 10 Gbit/s.
ports
l Steady yellow: The link rate is 1 Gbit/s.

Connection status l Off: No data is being transmitted or the


indicator/Data network port is not connected.
transmission l Steady green: The network port is properly
status indicator connected.
l Blinking green: Data is being transmitted.

l LOM with one Connection status l Off: No physical link is set up.
56G IB optical indicator l Steady green: The physical link is normal.
port
l Blinking green: The physical link is
l LOM with two abnormal.
56G IB optical
ports

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 22


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 2 Overview

LOM Type Indicator State Description

Data transmission l Off: No logical link is set up.


status indicator l Steady yellow: The logical link is normal but
no data is being transmitted.
l Blinking yellow: Data is being transmitted.

2.5 Physical Structure


Figure 2-18 shows the components of an RH2288H V3 with 12 hard disks.

Figure 2-18 RH2288H V3 components

1 I/O module 1 2 PCIe card on a riser card

3 PCIe card on the mainboard 4 I/O module 2

5 Internal cable guide 6 Chassis

7 Power supply unit (PSU) 8 PSU backplane

9 Air duct 10 Supercapacitor tray

11 Supercapacitor 12 Hard disk backplane

13 Fan module bracket 14 Fan module

15 Hard disk 16 Heat sink

17 DIMM 18 CPU

19 RAID controller card 20 TPM (optional)

21 Mainboard 22 SATADOM

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 23


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 2 Overview

23 LAN on motherboard (LOM) 24 CPU installation tool

Table 2-9 describes the RH2288H V3 components.

Table 2-9 RH2288H V3 components


No. Compone Description
nt

1 I/O module Supports the following configurations:


1 l One standard full-height full-length PCIe 3.0 x16 slot, one
standard full-height full-length PCIe 3.0 x8 slot, and one standard
full-height half-length PCIe 3.0 x8 slot (bandwidth of the three
slots: PCIe 3.0 x8)
l Two standard full-height full-length PCIe 3.0 x16 slots
(bandwidth of one of them: PCIe 3.0 x8)
l Two 2.5-inch hard disk slots and one standard full-height half-
length PCIe 3.0 x16 slot (bandwidth: PCIe 3.0 x8)
l Two 3.5-inch hard disk slots

2 PCIe card The RH2288H V3 supports two types of riser cards:


on a riser l Riser card 1 with three PCIe 3.0 x8 slots for the following
card devices:
One full-height full-length PCIe 3.0 x16 card (bandwidth:
PCIe 3.0 x8)
One full-height full-length PCIe 3.0 x8 card
One full-height half-length PCIe 3.0 x8 card
l Riser card 2 with two PCIe 3.0 x16 slots for the following
devices:
One full-height full-length PCIe 3.0 x16 card
One full-height full-length PCIe 3.0 x16 card (bandwidth:
PCIe 3.0 x8)
The two types of riser cards can be installed on both I/O modules 1
and 2.

3 PCIe card Two half-height half-length PCIe 3.0 x8 slots for standard PCIe cards
on the
mainboard

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 24


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 2 Overview

No. Compone Description


nt

4 I/O module Supports the following configurations:


2 l One standard full-height full-length PCIe 3.0 x16 slot, one
standard full-height full-length PCIe 3.0 x8 slot, and one standard
full-height half-length PCIe 3.0 x8 slot (bandwidth of the three
slots: PCIe 3.0 x8)
l Two standard full-height full-length PCIe 3.0 x16 slots
(bandwidth of one of them: PCIe 3.0 x8)
l Two 2.5-inch hard disk slots and one standard full-height half-
length PCIe 3.0 x16 slot (bandwidth: PCIe 3.0 x8)
l Two 3.5-inch hard disk slots

5 Internal Enables neat cabling.


cable guide

6 Chassis Houses all components.

7 PSU Two hot-swappable PSUs in 1+1 redundancy mode.


Choose the following types of PSUs based on the input power:
l AC PSUs: 100 V to 240 V AC
l DC PSUs: 48 V to 60 V DC
l 240 V high-voltage direct-current (HVDC) PSUs: 192 V to 288 V
DC
l 380 V HVDC PSUs: 260 V to 400 V DC
NOTICE
The PSUs provide short-circuit protection. The PSUs that support dual input
live wires provide double-pole fuses.

8 PSU Connects PSUs to the mainboard.


backplane

9 Air duct Facilitates chassis ventilation.

10 Supercapaci Secures a supercapacitor for a RAID controller card.


tor tray

11 Supercapaci Protects RAID cache data from power failures for controller card
tor using LSI SAS2208, LSI SAS3108, or SP435 (PM8060) chips on the
RH2288H V3.

12 Hard disk Supplies power to hard disks and provides data transmission
backplane channels.
The RH2288H V3 supports hard disk backplanes for connecting to 8
x 2.5-inch, 8 x 3.5-inch, 12, 12 (including four NVMe PCIe SSDs),
12 (including twelve NVMe PCIe SSDs), 24, 25 hard disks
respectively.

13 Fan module Secures a fan module.


bracket

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 25


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 2 Overview

No. Compone Description


nt

14 Fan Dissipate server heat and support hot swaps.


modules If fan modules are in full configuration, the server tolerates the failure
of a single fan module and supports fan speed adjustment by area,
maintaining optimal heat dissipation.

15 Hard disks Store data.


Hard disks are hot-swappable.

16 Heat sinks Dissipate heat from CPUs. Each CPU is configured with one heat
sink.

17 DIMMs l DIMM type: DDR4 registered dual-line memory modules


(RDIMMs) or load-reduced DIMMs (LRDIMMs)
l Maximum number of DIMMs: 24
l Maximum memory capacity: 3072 GB
l Capacity per DIMM: 8 GB, 16 GB, 32 GB, 64 GB, or 128 GB
l Memory speed: DDR4 1866 MT/s, 2133 MT/s, or 2400 MT/s

18 CPUs Process data.


To provide powerful data processing functions, the RH2288H V3 has
CPUs integrated with memory controllers and PCIe controllers. The
server supports the following CPU configurations:
l Intel Haswell-EP E5-2600 v3 4-core, 6-core, 8-core, 10-core,
12-core, 14-core, 16-core, and 18-core CPUs with up to 145 W
power.
l Intel Broadwell-EP E5-2600 v4 4-core, 6-core, 8-core, 10-core,
12-core, 14-core, 16-core, 18-core, 20-core, and 22-core CPUs
with up to 145 W power.
NOTE
The RH2288H V3 supports a maximum of two E5-2600 v3 series CPUs or two
E5-2600 v4 series CPUs.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 26


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 2 Overview

No. Compone Description


nt

19 RAID Supported RAID controller card models:


controller l SR320 or SR420:
card
Uses the LSI SAS2208 chip.
Supports RAID 0, 1, 10, 5, 50, 6, and 60.
Supports a supercapacitor for power failure protection.
l SR120:
Uses the LSI SAS2308 chip.
Supports RAID 0, 1, 1E, and 10.
Does not support power failure protection.
l SR130:
Uses the LSI SAS3008 chip.
Supports RAID 0, 1, 10, and 1E.
Does not support power failure protection.
l SR430C:
Uses the LSI SAS3108 chip.
Supports RAID 0, 1, 10, 5, 50, 6, and 60.
Supports a cache of 1 GB or 2 GB.
Supports a supercapacitor for power failure protection.
l SR135:
Uses the PM8068 chip.
Supports RAID 0, 1, 10, and 5.
Does not support power failure protection.
These RAID controller cards support RAID level migration and
RAID configuration memory.

20 TPM l Complies with the Trusted Computing Group (TCG) standards


(optional) l Protects the platform from viruses or unauthorized operations.

21 Mainboard Integrates basic components, including the BIOS chip, Platform


Controller Hub (PCH) chip, and PCIe slots, and provides CPU
sockets and slots for DIMMs and other components.
Integrates the SM750 display chip and provides 32 MB display
memory. The maximum resolution is 1920 pixels x 1200 pixels at 60
Hz with 16 M colors.
NOTE
If a resolution higher than 1280 x 1024 is required, you need to install
dedicated graphics card driver.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 27


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 2 Overview

No. Compone Description


nt

22 SATADOM A quick memory storage media unit that features high energy
efficiency and stability. It can be a SATA SSD or SATADOM
electrical hard disk.
SATADOMs use flash memory to store data. Currently, NAND flash
memory is mostly used in the industry. NAND flash memory stores
electrons on the floating gate to store data. However, electrons
frequently passing through the floating gate will weaken the gate's
ability to store electrons and eventually make the gate unable to store
electrons. This problem is common to NAND flash memory. The
amount of service data to be written needs to be assessed to prevent
component failures.
NOTE
l If the SoftRAID function is enabled on the server, the STATADOM
supports SoftRAID, which supports RAID 0 and RAID 1.
l A SATADOM can be used only as a boot disk for Linux OSs.
l SATADOMs have weak endurance and cannot be used as data storage
devices. Use enterprise-level HDDs or SSDs to replace SATADOMs for
data storage when frequent data erase operations are involved.
l Installing write-intensive service software on SATADOMs will accelerate
the write life consumption and result in perpetual damage of SATADOMs.
SATADOMs cannot be used for such services.
l SATADOMs cannot be used in cache scenarios.
l SATADOMs and built-in driver SATA ports are exchangeable.

23 LOM Supported configurations:


l One GE NIC with two or four GE ports, or one 10GE NIC with
two 10GE electrical or optical ports. Both NICs support the
Network Controller Sideband Interface (NC-SI).
l One IB NIC with one or two 56G IB optical ports. The NIC does
not support NC-SI.
NOTE
To query information about the LOMs supported by the RH2288H V3, use the
Huawei Server Compatibility Checker.

24 CPU When configuring a V3 series CPU, avoids twisted pins during CPU
installation installation and removal after the tool clips onto the CPU properly.
tool

2.6 Mainboard Layout


Figure 2-19 shows the ports on the mainboard.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 28


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 2 Overview

Figure 2-19 Ports on the mainboard

1 Serial port (J55 COM CONN) 2 VGA port (J54)


3 Mgmt network port (J33) 4 USB 3.0 port 2 (J39)
5 USB 3.0 port 1 (J40) 6 UID button/indicator
7 PCIe x8 slot 5 (corresponding to CPU 2, J49 PCIe 8 PCIe x8 slot 4 (corresponding to CPU 2, J50
x8 slot HH/HL) PCIe x8 slot HH/HL)
9 Riser card 1 connector (corresponding to CPU 1, J2 10 I/O card connector (J46-J45)
PCIe riser1 x16 signal)
11 PCH MiniSAS HD connector B (J1002) 12 PCH MiniSAS HD connector A (J1001)
13 BMC USB 2.0 connector (J34) 14 Rear hard disk backplane power connector 1
(J28 PWR CONN2)
15 Jumper (J36) 16 RAID controller card (J44)
17 LCD panel connector (J56) 18 Fan 4 connector (J130)
19 Right mounting ear connector (J43) 20 Fan 3 connector (J131)
21 Fan 2 connector (J132) 22 Fan 1 connector (J133)
23 Onboard USB 3.0 connector (J53) 24 Hard disk backplane power connector (J30
PWR CONN1)
25 Hard disk backplane signal connector (J1003) 26 Left mounting ear connector (J42)
27 SATA/SATADOM 1 (J37) 28 SATA/SATADOM 2 (J38)
29 PSU backplane connector (J31) 30 Rear hard disk backplane power connector 2
(J29 PWR CONN3)
31 TPM (J35) 32 SoftRAID key (J51)
33 NC-SI connector (J1008) 34 Dual-SD card mezzanine module (J57 SD
board)

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 29


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 2 Overview

35 Riser card 2 connector (corresponding to CPU 2, J3- - -


J1005)

2.7 Internal Cabling


This topic describes the internal cabling for an RH2288H V3 with different configurations.

NOTE
This section uses a RAID controller card on the mainboard as an example to describe how to connect
cables to the card. The method for connecting cables to a standard RAID controller card is the same as
that for connecting cables to a RAID controller card on the mainboard.

2.7.1 Internal Cabling for an M.2 SSD Riser Card

Internal Cabling for an M.2 SSD Riser Card on a Server with a DVD Drive
For an RH2288H V3 with a DVD drive, an M.2 SSD riser card can be configured with only
one M.2 SATA SSD card, which uses the external SATA2 port.

NOTE
An M.2 SSD riser card can be installed only in a PCIe slot on the mainboard or a riser card.

Figure 2-20 Internal cabling for an M.2 SSD riser card on a server with a DVD drive

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 30


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 2 Overview

No. Description BOM Number

1 SATA cable for connecting the SATA2 port of an M.2


04051409
SSD riser card to the mainboard (J38)
2 Power cable for connecting the DVD drive to the front
04050689
hard disk backplane (J11)
3 Signal cable for connecting the DVD drive to the
04050689
mainboard (J37)

Internal Cabling for an M.2 SSD Riser Card on a Server without a DVD Drive
For an RH2288H V3 without a DVD drive, an M.2 SSD riser card can be configured with two
M.2 SATA SSD cards, which use the external SATA1 and SATA2 ports.

NOTE
An M.2 SSD riser card can be installed only in a PCIe slot on the mainboard or a riser card.

Figure 2-21 Internal cabling for an M.2 SSD riser card on a server without a DVD drive

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 31


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 2 Overview

No. Description BOM Number

1 SATA cable for connecting the SATA1 port of an M.2


04051409
SSD riser card to the mainboard (J37)
2 SATA cable for connecting the SATA2 port of an M.2
04051409
SSD riser card to the mainboard (J38)

2.7.2 Internal Cabling for a Server with Eight 2.5-Inch Hard Disks

Internal Cabling for a Server with Eight 2.5-inch Hard Disks

Figure 2-22 Internal cabling for a server with eight 2.5-inch hard disks

N Description BOM Number


o.

1 Signal cable for connecting the indicator plate of the


04051026
right mounting ear to the mainboard (J43)
2 Signal cable for connecting the front VGA board to the
04051076
front hard disk backplane (J26)
3 Signal cable for connecting the DVD drive to the
04050689
mainboard (J37)
4 Signal cable for connecting the front hard disk 04051052
backplane (J1) to the mainboard (J1003)
NOTE
Signals from the VGA board to the mainboard are transmitted
through this cable.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 32


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 2 Overview

N Description BOM Number


o.

5 Power cable for connecting the DVD drive to the front


04050689
hard disk backplane (J11)
6 SAS cable for connecting Port B (J29) of the front hard 04051021 (LSI
disk backplane to Port B of the RAID controller card SAS3008/3108)
(J44) on the mainboard
04051024 (LSI
SAS2308/2208)

7 SAS cable for connecting Port A (J28) of the front hard 04051021 (LSI
disk backplane to Port A of the RAID controller card on SAS3008/3108)
the mainboard
04051024 (LSI
SAS2308/2208)

8 Signal cable for connecting the USB plate of the left


04051006
mounting ear to the mainboard (J42)
9 Power cable for connecting the front hard disk
04150997
backplane (J24) to the mainboard (J30 PWR CONN1)

2.7.3 Internal Cabling for a Server with Eight 3.5-Inch Hard Disks

Internal Cabling for a Server with a Hard Disk Controller Card Integrated into
the Chip

Figure 2-23 Internal cabling for a server with a hard disk controller card integrated into the
chip
1
2

3
4
5
6

8
9

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 33


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 2 Overview

N Description BOM Number


o.

1 Signal cable for connecting the indicator plate of the


04051026
right mounting ear to the mainboard (J43)
2 Signal cable for connecting the front VGA board to the
04051076
front hard disk backplane (J26)
3 Power cable for connecting the DVD drive to the front
04050689
hard disk backplane (J11)
4 Signal cable for connecting the DVD drive to the
04050689
mainboard (J37)
5 Signal cable for connecting Port B (J29) of the front 04051021
hard disk backplane to Port B (J1002) of the hard disk
controller card integrated into the chip
6 Signal cable for connecting Port A (J28) of the front 04051021
hard disk backplane to Port A (J1001) of the hard disk
controller card integrated into the chip
7 Signal cable for connecting the front hard disk 04051052
backplane (J1) to the mainboard (J1003)
NOTE
Signals from the VGA board to the mainboard are transmitted
through this cable.

8 Signal cable for connecting the USB plate of the left


04051006
mounting ear to the mainboard (J42)
9 Power cable for connecting the front hard disk
04150997
backplane (J24) to the mainboard (J30 PWR CONN1)

Internal Cabling for a Server with a RAID Controller Card on the Mainboard

Figure 2-24 Internal cabling for a server with a RAID controller card on the mainboard

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 34


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 2 Overview

No. Description BOM Number

1 Signal cable for connecting 04051026


the indicator plate of the right
mounting ear to the
mainboard (J43)
2 Signal cable for connecting 04051076
the front VGA board to the
front hard disk backplane
(J26)
3 Power cable for connecting 04050689
the DVD drive to the front
hard disk backplane (J11)
4 Signal cable for connecting 04050689
the DVD drive to the
mainboard (J37)
5 SAS cable for connecting 04051021 (LSI
Port B (J29) of the front hard SAS3008/3108)
disk backplane to Port B of
the RAID controller card on 04051024 (LSI
the mainboard SAS2308/2208)

6 SAS cable for connecting 04051021 (LSI


Port A (J28) of the front hard SAS3008/3108)
disk backplane to Port A of
the RAID controller card on 04051024 (LSI
the mainboard SAS2308/2208)

7 Signal cable for connecting 04051052


the front hard disk backplane
(J1) to the mainboard (J1003)
NOTE
Signals from the VGA board to
the mainboard are transmitted
through this cable.

8 Signal cable for connecting 04051006


the USB plate of the left
mounting ear to the
mainboard (J42)
9 Power cable for connecting 04150997
the front hard disk backplane
(J24) to the mainboard (J30
PWR CONN1)

2.7.4 Internal Cabling for 12-Disk Configuration

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 35


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 2 Overview

Internal Cabling for a Server with One RAID Controller Card


l A server supports four rear hard disks if it is configured with one RAID controller card.
The following table describes internal cabling for the server.

Figure 2-25 Internal cabling for a server with four rear hard disks
10 1

3
4

10
5

8
9

N Description BOM Number


o.

1 Signal cable for connecting the indicator plate of the


04051026
right mounting ear to the mainboard (J43)
2 Signal cable for connecting the front hard disk
04051053
backplane (J32) to the rear hard disk backplane (J24)
3 SAS cable for connecting Port A (J28) of the front 04051018 (LSI
hard disk backplane to Port A of the RAID SAS3008/3108)
controller card on the mainboard
04051022 (LSI
SAS2308/2208)

4 SAS cable for connecting Port B (J29) of the front 04051018 (LSI
hard disk backplane to Port B of the RAID controller SAS3008/3108)
card on the mainboard
04051022 (LSI
SAS2308/2208)

5 Signal cable for connecting the front hard disk


04051053
backplane (J35) to the rear hard disk backplane (J24)
6 SAS cable for connecting the front hard disk
04051060
backplane (J31) to the rear hard disk backplane (J3)
7 Signal cable for connecting the front hard disk
04051052
backplane (J1) to the mainboard (J1003)
8 Signal cable for connecting the USB plate of the left
04051006
mounting ear to the mainboard (J42)

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 36


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 2 Overview

N Description BOM Number


o.

9 Power cable for connecting the front hard disk 04150997


backplane (J24) to the mainboard (J30 PWR
CONN1)
10 Power cable for connecting the rear hard disk
04150448-001
backplane (J1) to the mainboard (J29 PWR CONN3)

l A server supports four NVMe PCIe SSDs and two rear hard disks if it is configured with
one RAID controller card. The following table describes internal cabling for the server.

Figure 2-26 Internal cabling for a server with four NVMe PCIe SSDs and two rear hard
disks

No. Description BOM Number

1 Signal cable for connecting 04051026


the indicator plate of the
right mounting ear to the
mainboard (J43)
2 Signal cable for connecting 04051053
the front hard disk
backplane (J32) to the rear
hard disk backplane (J24)

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 37


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 2 Overview

No. Description BOM Number

3 SAS cable for connecting 04051282


an NVMe PCIe SSD
adapter to the hard disk
backplane (Port 3-Port 3)
4 SAS cable for connecting 04051282
an NVMe PCIe SSD
adapter to the hard disk
backplane (Port 2-Port 2)
5 SAS cable for connecting 04051282
an NVMe PCIe SSD
adapter to the hard disk
backplane (Port 1-Port 1)
6 SAS cable for connecting 04052060
an NVMe PCIe SSD
adapter to the hard disk
backplane (Port 0-Port 0)
7 SAS cable for connecting 04051021 (LSI
Port A (J28) of the front SAS3008/3108)
hard disk backplane to Port
A of the RAID controller 04051024 (LSI
card on the mainboard SAS2308/2208)

8 SAS cable for connecting 04051021 (LSI


Port B (J29) of the front SAS3008/3108)
hard disk backplane to Port
B of the RAID controller 04051024 (LSI
card on the mainboard SAS2308/2208)

9 SAS cable for connecting 04051060


the front hard disk
backplane (J31) to the rear
hard disk backplane (J3)
10 Signal cable for connecting 04051052
the front hard disk
backplane (J1) to the
mainboard (J1003)
11 Signal cable for connecting 04051006
the USB plate of the left
mounting ear to the
mainboard (J42)
12 Power cable for connecting 04150997
the front hard disk
backplane (J24) to the
mainboard (J30 PWR
CONN1)

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 38


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 2 Overview

No. Description BOM Number

13 Power cable for connecting 04150448-001


the rear hard disk backplane
(J1) to the mainboard (J29
PWR CONN3)
l A server supports eight to twelve NVMe PCIe SSDs if it is configured with one RAID
controller card. The following table describes internal cabling for the server.

Figure 2-27 Internal cabling for a server with eight to twelve NVMe PCIe SSDs

No. Description BOM Number

1 Signal cable for connecting 04051026


the indicator plate of the
right mounting ear to the
mainboard (J43)
2 SAS cable for connecting 04051820
an PCIe extender adapter
for up to 12 NVMe PCIe
SSDs to the hard disk
backplane (Port C-Port 2C)
3 SAS cable for connecting 04051820
an PCIe extender adapter
for up to 12 NVMe PCIe
SSDs to the hard disk
backplane (Port A-Port 2A)

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 39


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 2 Overview

No. Description BOM Number

4 SAS cable for connecting 04051820


an PCIe extender adapter
for up to 12 NVMe PCIe
SSDs to the hard disk
backplane (Port B-Port 2B)
5 SAS cable for connecting 04051820
an PCIe extender adapter
for up to 12 NVMe PCIe
SSDs to the hard disk
backplane (Port C-Port 1C)
6 SAS cable for connecting 04051820
an PCIe extender adapter
for up to 12 NVMe PCIe
SSDs to the hard disk
backplane (Port B-Port 1B)
7 SAS cable for connecting 04051820
an PCIe extender adapter
for up to 12 NVMe PCIe
SSDs to the hard disk
backplane (Port A-Port 1A)
8 SAS cable for connecting 04051021 (LSI
Port A of the front hard SAS3008/3108)
disk backplane to Port B of
the RAID controller card on 04051024 (LSI
the mainboard SAS2308/2208)

9 Signal cable for connecting 04051052


the front hard disk
backplane (J1) to the
mainboard (J1003)
10 Power cable for connecting 04150997
the front hard disk
backplane (J24) to the
mainboard (P0WER)
11 Signal cable for connecting 04051006
the USB plate of the left
mounting ear to the
mainboard (J42)

NOTE
On the RAID controller card screen, slots 4 to 7 for RAID controller cards map to slots 0 to 3 for
hard disks.

2.7.5 Internal Cabling for 24-Disk Configuration

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 40


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 2 Overview

Internal Cabling for a Server with One RAID Controller Card


The RH2288H V3 does not support rear hard disks if it is configured with one RAID
controller card.

Figure 2-28 Internal cabling for a server with one RAID controller card

No. Description BOM Number

1 Signal cable for connecting the indicator plate of the 04051026


right mounting ear to the mainboard (J43)

2 SAS cable for connecting Port B (J29) of the front 04051021 (LSI
hard disk backplane to Port B of the RAID controller SAS3008/3108)
card on the mainboard
04051024 (LSI
SAS2308/2208)

3 SAS cable for connecting Port A (J28) of the front 04051021 (LSI
hard disk backplane to Port A of the RAID controller SAS3008/3108)
card on the mainboard
04051024 (LSI
SAS2308/2208)

4 Signal cable for connecting the front hard disk 04051052


backplane (J1) to the mainboard (J1003)

5 Signal cable for connecting the USB plate of the left 04051006
mounting ear to the mainboard (J42)

6 Power cable for connecting the front hard disk 04150997


backplane (J24) to the mainboard (J30 PWR CONN1)

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 41


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 2 Overview

Internal Cabling for a Server with Two RAID Controller Cards


The RH2288H V3 does not support rear hard disks if it is configured with two RAID
controller cards, which include one RAID controller card in a standard PCIe slot and one on
the mainboard.

Figure 2-29 Internal cabling for a server with two RAID controller cards

No. Description BOM Number

1 Signal cable for connecting the indicator plate of the


04051026
right mounting ear to the mainboard (J43)
2 SAS cable for connecting Port B (J31) of the front 04051021 (LSI
hard disk backplane to Port B of the RAID controller SAS3008/3108)
card in a standard PCIe slot
04051024 (LSI
SAS2308/2208)
NOTE
This cable is delivered along
with the standard PCIe card.
The BOM number of the SAS
cable for non-Huawei 4 GB
cache PCIe cards is 04051390,
which is different from that for
standard PCIe cards.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 42


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 2 Overview

No. Description BOM Number

3 SAS cable for connecting Port A (J30) of the front 04051021 (LSI
hard disk backplane to Port A of the RAID controller SAS3008/3108)
card in a standard PCIe slot
04051024 (LSI
SAS2308/2208)
NOTE
This cable is delivered along
with the standard PCIe card.
The BOM number of the SAS
cable for non-Huawei 4 GB
cache PCIe cards is 04051390,
which is different from that for
standard PCIe cards.

4 SAS cable for connecting Port B (J29) of the front 04051021 (LSI
hard disk backplane to Port B of the RAID controller SAS3008/3108)
card on the mainboard
04051024 (LSI
SAS2308/2208)

5 SAS cable for connecting Port A (J28) of the front 04051021 (LSI
hard disk backplane to Port A of the RAID controller SAS3008/3108)
card on the mainboard
04051024 (LSI
SAS2308/2208)

6 Signal cable for connecting the front hard disk


04051052
backplane (J1) to the mainboard (J1003)
7 Signal cable for connecting the USB plate of the left
04051006
mounting ear to the mainboard (J42)
8 Power cable for connecting the front hard disk 04150997
backplane (J24) to the mainboard (J30 PWR
CONN1)

NOTE
The silkscreen slot numbers for the standard PCIe cards of some models are Port 0 and Port 1, which
correspond to Port A and Port B respectively.
Table 2-10 shows the mapping between the slot numbers in the LSI Logic SAS BIOS CU and
the panel silkscreen when the RH2288H V3 is configured with 24 front hard disks and two
RAID controller cards.

Table 2-10 Mapping between the slot numbers in the LSI Logic SAS BIOS CU and the panel
silkscreen (2 RAID controller cards)
Adapter No. in the CU Slot No. in the CU Panel Silkscreen

0 Slots 07 07

1 Slots 07 815

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 43


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 2 Overview

l (4) and (5) of Figure 2-29 show the cable connection of RAID controller card 0 (adapter
0).
l (2) and (3) of Figure 2-29 show the cable connection of RAID controller card 1 (adapter
1).

Internal Cabling for a Server with Three RAID Controller Cards


The RH2288H V3 does not support rear hard disks if it is configured with three RAID
controller cards, including two in standard PCIe slots and one on the mainboard.

Figure 2-30 Internal cabling for a server with three RAID controller cards

No. Description BOM Number

1 Signal cable for connecting the indicator plate of the


04051026
right mounting ear to the mainboard (J43)
2 SAS cable for connecting Port B (J33) of the front 04051021 (LSI
hard disk backplane to Port B of the RAID controller SAS3008/3108)
card in a standard PCIe slot
04051024 (LSI
SAS2308/2208)
NOTE
This cable is delivered along
with the standard PCIe card.
The BOM number of the SAS
cable for non-Huawei 4 GB
cache PCIe cards is 04051390,
which is different from that for
standard PCIe cards.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 44


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 2 Overview

No. Description BOM Number

3 SAS cable for connecting Port A (J39) of the front 04051021 (LSI
hard disk backplane to Port A of the RAID controller SAS3008/3108)
card in a standard PCIe slot
04051024 (LSI
SAS2308/2208)
NOTE
This cable is delivered along
with the standard PCIe card.
The BOM number of the SAS
cable for non-Huawei 4 GB
cache PCIe cards is 04051390,
which is different from that for
standard PCIe cards.

4 SAS cable for connecting Port B (J31) of the front 04051021 (LSI
hard disk backplane to Port B of the RAID controller SAS3008/3108)
card in a standard PCIe slot
04051024 (LSI
SAS2308/2208)
NOTE
This cable is delivered along
with the standard PCIe card.
The BOM number of the SAS
cable for non-Huawei 4 GB
cache PCIe cards is 04051390,
which is different from that for
standard PCIe cards.

5 SAS cable for connecting Port A (J30) of the front 04051021 (LSI
hard disk backplane to Port A of the RAID controller SAS3008/3108)
card in a standard PCIe slot
04051024 (LSI
SAS2308/2208)
NOTE
This cable is delivered along
with the standard PCIe card.
The BOM number of the SAS
cable for non-Huawei 4 GB
cache PCIe cards is 04051390,
which is different from that for
standard PCIe cards.

6 SAS cable for connecting Port B (J29) of the front 04051021 (LSI
hard disk backplane to Port B of the RAID controller SAS3008/3108)
card on the mainboard
04051024 (LSI
SAS2308/2208)

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 45


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 2 Overview

No. Description BOM Number

7 SAS cable for connecting Port A (J28) of the front 04051021 (LSI
hard disk backplane to Port A of the RAID controller SAS3008/3108)
card on the mainboard
04051024 (LSI
SAS2308/2208)

8 Signal cable for connecting the front hard disk


04051052
backplane (J1) to the mainboard (J1003)
9 Signal cable for connecting the USB plate of the left
04051006
mounting ear to the mainboard (J42)
10 Power cable for connecting the front hard disk 04150997
backplane (J24) to the mainboard (J30 PWR
CONN1)

Table 2-11 shows the mapping between the slot numbers in the RAID controller card CU and
the panel silkscreen when the RH2288H V3 is configured with 24 front hard disks and three
RAID controller cards.

Table 2-11 Mapping between the slot numbers in the RAID CU and the panel silkscreen (3
RAID controller cards)
Adapter No. in the CU Slot No. in the CU Panel Silkscreen

0 Slots 07 07

1 Slots 07 815

2 Slots 07 1623

l (6) and (7) of Figure 2-30 show the cable connection of RAID controller card 0 (adapter
0).
l (4) and (5) of Figure 2-30 show the cable connection of RAID controller card 1 (adapter
1).
l (2) and (3) of Figure 2-30 show the cable connection of RAID controller card 2 (adapter
2).

2.7.6 Internal Cabling for 25-Disk Configuration

Internal Cabling for a Server with One RAID Controller Card


The RH2288H V3 supports three rear hard disks if it is configured with one RAID controller
card.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 46


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 2 Overview

Figure 2-31 Internal cabling for a server with one RAID controller card

No Description BOM Number


.

1 Signal cable for connecting the indicator plate of the


04051026
right mounting ear to the mainboard (J43)
2 Signal cable for connecting the front hard disk
04051053
backplane (J32) to the rear hard disk backplane (J24)
3 SAS cable for connecting Port A (J28) of the front hard 04051018 (LSI
disk backplane to Port A of the RAID controller card SAS3008/3108)
on the mainboard
04051022 (LSI
SAS2308/2208)

4 SAS cable for connecting Port B (J29) of the front hard 04051018 (LSI
disk backplane to Port B of the RAID controller card SAS3008/3108)
on the mainboard
04051022 (LSI
SAS2308/2208)

5 Signal cable for connecting the front hard disk


04051053
backplane (J35) to the rear hard disk backplane (J24)
6 SAS cable for connecting the front hard disk backplane
04051060
(J31) to the rear hard disk backplane (J3)
7 Signal cable for connecting the front hard disk
04051052
backplane (J1) to the mainboard (J1003)
8 Signal cable for connecting the USB plate of the left
04051006
mounting ear to the mainboard (J42)
9 Power cable for connecting the front hard disk
04150997
backplane (J24) to the mainboard (J30 PWR CONN1)

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 47


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 2 Overview

No Description BOM Number


.

10 Power cable for connecting the rear hard disk


04150448-001
backplane (J1) to the mainboard (J29 PWR CONN3)

2.8 Logical Structure


Figure 2-32 shows the RH2288H V3 logical structure.
l The RH2288H V3 supports two Intel Xeon E5-2600 v3 Haswell-EP or E5-2600 v4
Broadwell-EP series CPUs and 24 dual in-line memory modules (DIMMs). CPUs are
connected over QuickPath Interconnect (QPI) buses at up to 9.6 GT/s.
l A CPU connects to twoone Peripheral Component Interconnect Express (PCIe) riser
cards over PCIe connectors to provide different types of PCIe slots.
l Hard disks are managed by the RAID controller card or PCH.
l A RAID controller card combines with the hard disk backplane to work as the hard disk
interface module, which connects to CPUs over PCIe connectors.

Figure 2-32 RH2288H V3 logical structure

2.9 RAS Features


Table 2-12 describes the RAS features supported by the RH2288H V3. You can configure
these features to improve server RAS.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 48


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 2 Overview

NOTE

For details about how to configure RAS features, see HUAWEI Server Grantley Platform BIOS
Parameter Reference.

Table 2-12 RAS features


Mod Feature Description
ule

CPU Corrected machine Corrects error-triggered interrupts.


check interrupt (CMCI)

DIM Failed DIMM isolation Identifies a faulty dual in-line memory module
M (DIMM), and isolates it from others before replacing
the DIMM.

Memory thermal Automatically adjusts DIMM temperatures to avoid


throttling damage due to overheating.

Rank sparing Allocates memory ranks as backup ranks to prevent


the system from crashing due to uncorrectable errors.

Memory address parity Detects memory command and address errors.


protection

Memory demand and Provides the memory patrol function for promptly
patrol scrubbing correcting correctable errors upon detection. If these
errors are not corrected promptly, uncorrectable errors
may occur.

Memory mirroring Improves system reliability.

Single device data Provides a single-device, multi-bit error correction


correction (SDDC) capability to improve memory reliability.

Device tagging Degrades and rectifies DIMM device faults to improve


DIMM availability.

Data scrambling Optimizes data stream distribution and reduces the


error possibility to improve the reliability of data
streams in the memory and the capability to detect
address errors.

PCIe PCIe advanced error Improves server serviceability.


reporting

QPI Intel QPI link level retry Provides a retry mechanism upon encountering errors
to improve QPI reliability.

Intel QPI protocol Provides cyclic redundancy check (CRC) protection


protection via CRC for QPI packets to improve system reliability.

OS Core disable for fault Isolates a faulty CPU during startup to improve system
resilient boot (FRB) reliability and availability.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 49


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 2 Overview

Mod Feature Description


ule

Corrupt data Identifies the memory storage unit that contains


containment mode corrupted data to minimize the impact on running
programs and improve system reliability.

Socket disable for FRB Isolates a faulty socket during startup to improve
system reliability.

Architected error records With the eMCA feature, the basic input/output system
(BIOS) collects error information recorded in hardware
registers in compliance with UEFI specifications,
sends the error information to the OS over the APEI of
the Advanced Configuration and Power Interface
(ACPI), and locates the error unit, improving system
availability.

Error injection support Injects errors to verify various RAS features.

Machine check Provides software recovery for uncorrectable errors,


architecture (MCA) which improves system availability.

Enhanced MCA Improves system availability.


(eMCA): Gen2

OOB access to MCA The out-of-band system accesses MCA registers by


registers using the Platform Environment Control Interface
(PECI). If a fatal error occurs in the system, the out-of-
band system collects onsite data to facilitate error
analysis and locating and improve system
serviceability.

BIOS abstraction layer The BIOS processes errors and reports error
for error handling information to the OS and iBMC in compliance with
specifications to improve system serviceability.

BIOS-based predictive The BIOS provides physical unit information for


failure analysis (PFA) DIMM errors, and the OS traces and predicts errors,
and isolates error memory pages.

2.10 Software and Hardware Compatibility


For details about the software and hardware compatibility of the RH2288H V3, see Huawei
Server Compatibility Checker.
The RH2288H V3 supports a variety of operating systems (OSs), including Windows, SUSE
Linux Enterprise Server (SLES), and Red Hat Enterprise Linux (RHEL). For details about the
OS compatibility of the RH2288H V3, see Huawei Server Compatibility Checker.
For OSs supported by NVMe PCIe SSDs, see Huawei ES3000 V3 NVMe SSD
Compatibility List.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 50


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 2 Overview

2.11 Product Specifications


Table 2-13 describes the RH2288H V3 product specifications.

Table 2-13 Product specifications


Item Specifications

Form factor 2U rack server

CPU l Up to two Intel Xeon E5-2600 v3 series CPUs:


Number of cores per CPU: 18 cores (2.3 GHz), 16 cores (2.3
GHz), 14 cores (2.6 GHz), 12 cores (2.6 GHz), 10 cores (2.6
GHz), 8 cores (3.2 GHz), 6 cores (3.4 GHz), and 4 cores (3.5
GHz)
Number of QPI links: 2
Maximum transmission speed per QPI link: 9.6 GT/s
Maximum L3 cache capacity: 45 MB
l Up to two Intel Xeon E5-2600 v4 series CPUs:
Number of cores per CPU: 22 cores (2.2 GHz), 20 cores (2.2
GHz), 18 cores (2.3 GHz), 16 cores (2.6 GHz), 14 cores (2.6
GHz), 12 cores (2.2 GHz), 10 cores (2.4 GHz), 8 cores (3.2 GHz),
6 cores (3.4 GHz), and 4 cores (3.5 GHz)
Number of QPI links: 2
Maximum transmission speed per QPI link: 9.6 GT/s
Maximum L3 cache capacity: 55 MB
NOTE
l For Intel Xeon E5-2600 v4 series processors:
l The BIOS version must be 3.16 or later.
l You are advised to upgrade the iBMC and BIOS to the latest mapping
versions.
l The CPUs on one server must have the same BOM number. For details
about BOM numbers, see Huawei Server Compatibility Checker.

Chipset Intel C612

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 51


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 2 Overview

Item Specifications

RAID support The RH2288H V3 supports the following models of RAID controller
cards:
l SR320 or SR420:
Uses the LSI SAS2208 chip.
Supports RAID 0, 1, 10, 5, 50, 6, and 60.
Supports a supercapacitor for power failure protection.
l SR120:
Uses the LSI SAS2308 chip.
Supports RAID 0, 1, 1E, and 10.
Does not support power failure protection.
l SR130:
Uses the LSI SAS3008 chip.
Supports RAID 0, 1, 10, and 1E.
Does not support power failure protection.
l SR430C:
Uses the LSI SAS3108 chip.
Supports RAID 0, 1, 10, 5, 50, 6, and 60.
Supports a cache of 1 GB or 2 GB.
Supports a supercapacitor for power failure protection.
l SP435:
Uses the PM8060 chip.
Supports RAID 0, 1, 10, 5, 50, 6, and 60.
Supports a supercapacitor for power failure protection.
l SR135:
Uses the PM8068 chip.
Supports RAID 0, 1, 10, and 5.
Does not support power failure protection.
These RAID controller cards support RAID level migration and RAID
configuration memory.
NOTE
The SP435 (PM8060) controller card is a standard PCIe card, which can be
installed in a PCIe slot.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 52


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 2 Overview

Item Specifications

Memory Up to 24 DDR4 DIMM slots (12 DIMMs per CPU) for installing either
RDIMMs or LRDIMMs
l 24 x 32 GB RDIMMs for two CPUs, with a maximum memory
capacity of 768 GB
l 24 x 128 GB LRDIMMs for two CPUs, with a maximum memory
capacity of 3072 GB
l Maximum memory speed: 2400 MT/s
l Memory protection technologies: Error Checking and Correction
(ECC), memory mirroring, Single Device Data Correction (SDDC),
memory sparing, and lockstep
NOTE
DIMMs of different types (RDIMMs and LRDIMMs) and specifications (such as
the capacity, bit width, rank, and height) cannot be installed on one server. That is,
all DIMMs on one server must have the same BOM number. To query the BOM
numbers of DIMMs, use the Huawei Server Compatibility Checker.

Storage l Multiple hard disk configuration specifications are provided. For


details, see 2.1 Introduction.
l Built-in storage:
Dual miniSSDs (SATADOMs)
Dual SD cards
NOTE
The SD card controller integrated on the mainboard groups the two SD
cards into a RAID1 array to improve data security.
l Hard disks are hot-swappable.
l The server supports RAID 0, 1, 10, 1E, 5, 50, 6, and 60. It protects
cache data from power failures, and supports RAID state migration,
RAID configuration memory, self-diagnosis, and web-based remote
configuration.
l The mainboard can be configured with a SAS adapter or SAS RAID
controller card (with a maximum of 2 GB cache) to improve hard
disk storage performance and ensure user data security.
l The RAID controller card does not occupy a standard PCIe slot,
improving system scalability.
NOTE
l If the server is equipped with 12 hard disks on the front, you can install two or
four 2.5-inch SAS HDDs, SATA HDDs, and SSDs or 3.5-inch SAS HDDs and
SATA HDDs at the rear of the server to expand the local storage capacity.
l If the server is equipped with 25 hard disks on the front, you can install three
2.5-inch SAS HDDs, SATA HDDs, and SSDs at the rear of the server to
expand the local storage capacity.
l If SATADOM SoftRAID is used when NVMe PCIe SSDs are configured,
only the Legacy mode can be selected for the BIOS.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 53


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 2 Overview

Item Specifications

Network port Six types of NICs are supported, which provide the following network
ports:
l Two GE electrical ports, supporting NC-SI, Wake on LAN (WOL),
and Preboot Execution Environment (PXE)
l Four GE optical ports, supporting NC-SI, WOL, and PXE
l Two 10GE optical ports, supporting NC-SI and PXE
l Two 10GE electrical ports, supporting NC-SI, WOL, and PXE
l Two 56G IB optical ports. The NIC does not support NC-SI, WOL,
and PXE
l One 56G IB optical port. The NIC does not support NC-SI, WOL,
and PXE

PCIe slot l The RH2288H V3 provides eight standard PCIe 3.0 x8 slots and one
PCIe 3.0 x8 slot dedicated for a RAID controller card.
The eight standard PCIe 3.0 x8 slots are described as follows:
One full-height full-length standard PCIe 3.0 x16 slot
(bandwidth: PCIe 3.0 x8), one full-height full-length standard
PCIe 3.0 x8 slot, and one full-height half-length standard PCIe
3.0 x8 slot on I/O module 1
One full-height full-length standard PCIe 3.0 x16 slot
(bandwidth: PCIe 3.0 x8), one full-height full-length standard
PCIe 3.0 x8 slot, and one full-height half-length standard PCIe
3.0 x8 slot on I/O module 2
Two half-height half-length standard PCIe 3.0 x8 cards on the
mainboard
l PCIe slots on an I/O module can house a maximum of four Huawei
ES3000 V2 SSDs, which greatly improves I/O performance for
search, cache, and download services.
l PCIe slots can house K20c, K10, and 7120P GPUs.
NOTE
l The specifications for I/O module 1 or 2 are as follows:
l One full-height full-length standard PCIe 3.0 x16 slot (bandwidth: PCIe
3.0 x8), one full-height full-length standard PCIe 3.0 x8 slot, and one full-
height half-length standard PCIe 3.0 x8 slot
l Two full-height full-length standard PCIe 3.0 x16 slots (bandwidth of one
slot: PCIe 3.0 x8)
l Two 2.5-inch hard disk slots and one full-height half-length standard PCIe
3.0 x16 slot (bandwidth: PCIe 3.0 x8)
l Two 3.5-inch hard disk slots
l The fifth-generation SSD cards must be installed in the two slots on a riser
card. A server supports a maximum of four fifth-generation SSD cards.
l A server supports a maximum of two full-height dual-slot GPUs. The GPUs
must be installed on a dedicated riser card cooling by 8056 plus fans.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 54


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 2 Overview

Item Specifications

Port l Two USB 2.0 ports and one DB15 VGA port on the front panel (the
server supports up to eight 2.5-inch or ten 3.5-inch hard disks)
l Two USB 3.0 ports, one DB15 VGA port, one DB9 serial port, and
one RJ45 system management port on the rear panel
l One internal USB 3.0 port, one internal dual-SD card port, and two
internal miniSSDs (SATADOMs) for installing an OS or prebooting
an installation program
NOTE
The internal USB port cannot be used for installing a Windows OS. The
server with two internal miniSSDs (SATADOMs) and SoftRAID does not
support the installation of a virtualization OS. For details about the types of
OSs that can be installed, see Huawei Server Compatibility Checker.

Fan module Four hot-swappable fan modules, tolerating the failure of a single fan
NOTE
l If you use high-power, passive-cooling GPUs, configure fan modules with
higher cooling efficiency. To query GPU information, use the Huawei Server
Compatibility Checker.
l The fans on one server must have the same BOM number.

PSU Two hot-swappable PSUs are in redundancy mode:


l 460 W AC Platinum PSU, supporting 240 V HVDC
l 750 W AC Platinum PSU, supporting 240 V HVDC
l 750 W AC Titanium PSU
l 1200 W AC Platinum PSU, supporting 240 V HVDC
l 1200 W PSU, supporting 380 V HVDC
l 800 W PSU, supporting 48 V DC or 60 V DC
NOTE
The PSUs on one server must have the same BOM number. For details about
BOM numbers, see Huawei Server Compatibility Checker.

System l UEFI
management l HUAWEI iBMC
Uses an independent port.
Supports Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) and
Intelligent Platform Management Interface (IPMI).
Provides the GUI, virtual KVM, virtual media, Serial Over LAN
(SOL), intelligent power supply, remote control, and hardware
monitoring features.
l NC-SI
l Supports Huawei eSight management software and integration with
third-party management systems, such as VMware vCenter,
Microsoft SystemCenter, and Nagios.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 55


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 2 Overview

Item Specifications

Security l Power-on password


l Administrator password
l TPM
l Chassis-opening logging
l Front bezel

GPU Integrates the SM750 display chip and provides 32 MB display memory.
The maximum resolution is 1920 pixels x 1200 pixels at 60 Hz with 16
M colors.
NOTE
If a resolution higher than 1280 x 1024 is required, you need to install dedicated
graphics card driver.

2.12 Physical Specifications


Table 2-14 describes the physical and environmental specifications for the RH2288H V3.

Table 2-14 Physical and environmental specifications


Item Specifications

Dimensions (H x l Chassis equipped with 3.5-inch hard disks: 86.1 mm (2 U) x 447


W x D) mm x 748 mm (3.39 in. x 17.60 in. x 29.45 in.)
l Chassis equipped with 2.5-inch hard disks: 86.1 mm (2 U) x 447
mm x 708 mm (3.39 in. x 17.60 in. x 27.87 in.)

Installation space The server fits into a universal cabinet that complies with the IEC 297
standard:
l Width: 19 in.
l Depth: > 1000 mm (39.37 in.)
Requirements for guide rail installation:
l L-shaped guide rails: apply only to a Huawei cabinet.
l Adjustable guide rails: apply to a cabinet with a distance of 543.5
mm to 848.5 mm (21.40 in. to 33.41 in.) between the front and
rear mounting bars.
l Holding rails: apply to a cabinet with a distance of 610 mm to 914
mm (24.02 in. to 35.98 in.) between the front and rear mounting
bars.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 56


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 2 Overview

Item Specifications

PSU power rating The PSUs support the following power ratings:
l 460 W AC PSU: 460 W (input voltage range: 100 V to 240 V AC
or 192 V to 288 V DC)
l 750 W AC PSU: 750 W (input voltage range: 100 V to 240 V AC
or 192 V to 288 V DC)
l 800 W DC PSU: 800 W (input voltage range: 36 V to 75 V
DC)
l 1200 W high-voltage direct current (HVDC) PSU: 1200 W (input
voltage range: 260 V to 400 V DC)
l 1200 W AC PSU:
750 W (input voltage: 100 V AC)
900 W (input voltage range: 110 V to 127 V AC)
1200 W (input voltage range: 200 V to 240 V AC)
1200 W (input voltage range: 192 V to 288 V DC)

Weight in full Net weight:


configuration l With eight 2.5-inch hard disks: 27 kg (59.54 lb)
l With eight 3.5-inch hard disks: 29 kg (63.95 lb)
l With twelve 3.5-inch hard disks: 30 kg (66.15 lb)
l With twenty-four 2.5-inch hard disks: 29 kg (63.95 lb)
l With twenty-five 2.5-inch hard disks: 30 kg (66.15 lb)
Packing material weight: 5 kg (11.03 lb)

Rated input l 460 W, 750 W or 1200 W AC PSUs: 100 V to 240 V AC


voltage l 460 W, 750 W or 1200 W AC PSUs (compatible with 240 V
HVDC PSUs): 192 V to 288 V DC
l 800 W DC PSUs: 36 V to 75 V DC
l 1200 W high-voltage direct current (HVDC) PSUs: 260 V to 400
V DC
NOTE
The recommended current specification for the external power circuit breaker
connected to the RH2288H V3 is 32 A.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 57


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 2 Overview

Item Specifications

Temperature l Operating temperature: 5C to 45C (41F to 113F) (ASHRAE


Class A3 and A4 compliant)
l Storage temperature: 40C to +65C (40F to +149F)
l Temperature change rate: < 20C/h (36F/h)
l Long-term storage temperature: 21C to 27C (69.8F to 80.6F)
NOTE
l When PCIe SSD cards or NVMe PCIe SSDs are used, the RH2288H V3
supports the maximum operating temperature of 35C (95F) and the
failure of one fan may result in performance deterioration.
l The RH2288H V3 supports the maximum operating temperature of 35C
(95F) when it is equipped with rear hard disks.
l The RH2288H V3 can work at the highest temperature of 40C (86F)
when it is configured with E5-2699 v3, E5-2698 v3, E5-2697 v3, E5-2690
v3, E5-2667 v3, E5-2643 v3, E5-2637 v3, E5-2699A v4, E5-2699 v4,
E5-2698 v4, E5-2697A v4, E5-2697 v4, E5-2690 v4, E5-2667 v4, E5-2643
v4, or E5-2637 v4 CPUs. If the environment temperature is over 40C
(86F) or one fan fails, CPU performance may deteriorate.
l When GPUs of 200 W or higher are used, the RH2288H V3 supports the
maximum operating temperature of 35C (95F) and a maximum of eight
front hard disks. When K80 and P100 GPUs are used, the RH2288H V3
supports the maximum operating temperature of 30C (86F). The failure
of one fan may result in GPU performance deterioration.

Humidity l Operating humidity: 8% RH to 90% RH (non-condensing)


l Storage humidity: 5% RH to 95% RH (non-condensing)
l Humidity change rate: < 20% RH/h
l Long-term storage humidity: 30% RH to 69% RH (non-
condensing)

Altitude 3048 m (9999.88 ft)


l When the altitude is higher than 900 m (2952.72 ft), the operating
temperature decreases by 1C (1.8F) as the altitude increases by
300 m (984.24 ft).
l At an altitude of over 3000 m (9842.5 ft), only Titanium PSUs can
be used.
l HDDs are not supported at an altitude of over 3000 m (9842.5 ft).

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 58


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 2 Overview

Item Specifications

Acoustic Noise The data listed in the following is the declared A-weighted sound
power levels (LWAd) and declared average bystander position A-
weighted sound pressure levels (LpAm) when the server is operating
in a 23C (73.4F) ambient environment. Noise emissions are
measured in accordance with ISO 7999 (ECMA 74) and declared in
accordance with ISO 9296 (ECMA 109).
l Idle:
LWAd: 5.1 Bels
LpAm: 35.1 dBA
l Operating:
LWAd: 6.1 Bels
LpAm: 45.1 dBA
NOTE
The actual sound levels generated during server operating vary depending on
the server configuration, load, and ambient temperature.

Corrosive air l Corrosion rate of the copper test piece: < 300 /month (in
pollutant compliance with the ANSI/ISA-71.04-2013 gaseous corrosion
level G1)
l Corrosion rate of the silver test piece: < 200 /month

Particulate l The ISO14664-1 Class 8 requirements are met.


pollutant You are advised to ask a professional organization to monitor
particulate pollutants in the equipment room.
l There is no explosive, conductive, magnetic, or corrosive dust in
the equipment room.

Power The power consumption changes depending on the server


consumption configuration. For details, see Huawei Server Power Calculator.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 59


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 3 Installing and Removing an RH2288H V3

3 Installing and Removing an RH2288H V3

About This Chapter

This topic describes the precautions and procedures for installing and removing an RH2288H
V3.
3.1 Installation Overview
3.2 Unpacking the Chassis
3.3 Installing a Server
3.4 Connecting External Cables
3.5 Removing the RH2288H V3

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 60


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 3 Installing and Removing an RH2288H V3

3.1 Installation Overview

NOTE

For details about the safety instructions during the process of installing or replacing a server or its parts, see
"Safety" in the Server Product Documentation.

Checking the Installation Environment


To ensure the proper installation and operating of the RH2288H V3, prepare the installation
environment before installation. The installation environment includes the cabinet, space,
temperature, and humidity.

Space Requirements
l An RH2288H V3 must be installed in an access-restricted area.
l Keep the area in which the server is located clean and tidy.
l For easy heat dissipation and maintenance, keep a clearance of 800 mm (31.50 in.)
between walls and the front or rear doors of the cabinet.
NOTE

The server draws in cool air from the front of the cabinet and exhausts hot air from the rear. Therefore,
the front and rear of the cabinet must be well ventilated for optimal heat dissipation.
Cabinet Requirements
l A standard 19-inch cabinet with a depth of more than 1000 mm (39.37 in.).
l Complies with International Electrotechnical Commission 297 (IEC 297).
l Air filters installed on cabinet doors.
l AC power supplied from the rear of the cabinet.
Temperature and Humidity Requirements
l Use temperature control devices all year long in any climates.
l In dry areas, use humidifiers to ensure ambient humidity.
l In humid areas, use dehumidifiers.

Table 3-1 Temperature and humidity requirements in the equipment room

Item Description

Temperature 5C to 40C (41F to 104F)

Humidity 8% RH to 90% RH (non-condensing)

Installation Rules
The RH2288H V3 is 2 U high and can be installed in a standard 19-inch cabinet. Servers can
be stacked in a cabinet. If cabinet space permits, the distance among servers can be 1 U.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 61


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 3 Installing and Removing an RH2288H V3

3.2 Unpacking the Chassis

Tools
The following tools must be available before the operation:
l Protective gloves
l ESD gloves or ESD wrist strap
l Box cutter

Procedure
Step 1 Check whether the package and seals are in good condition.
NOTE

If the package is damaged (for example, the package is soaked or deformed, or the seals or pressure
sensitive adhesive tape is unsealed), fill in the Cargo Problems Feedback Form.

Step 2

CAUTION
Exercise caution when using a box cutter to avoid personal injury or equipment damage.

Use a box cutter to cut the pressure-sensitive adhesive tape on the package, and open the
package.
Step 3 Based on Table 3-2, check that the components are intact and free from oxidation, corrosion,
or damage. Ensure that no parts are missing.

Table 3-2 Packing items


No. Description

1 Accessory box, containing the product documentation DVD, one


ServiceCD, Quick Start Guide, and warranty card

2 A pair of guide rails

3 One rack server

----End

3.3 Installing a Server


This topic describes how to install a server on L-shaped guide rails, adjustable guide rails, and
holding rails. Choose an installation method based on site conditions.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 62


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 3 Installing and Removing an RH2288H V3

Install a server if:


l Additional servers are required in a cabinet for capacity expansion.
l A faulty server needs to be replaced with a new RH2288H V3.
l A different rack server needs to be replaced with the server.
l A server component needs to be maintained.

NOTICE
Before installing a server, check that the guide rails of the cabinet are level, smooth, and not
deformed. This ensures surface contact between the server and the guide rails and even weight
distribution. You are advised to use the guide rails delivered with the server to ensure even
weight distribution.

Tools
The following tools are available:
l ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves: used to prevent ESD damage
l Screwdriver: used to tighten screws on the panel
l Floating nut hook: used to install floating nuts

3.3.1 Installing a Server on L-Shaped Guide Rails


L-shaped guide rails apply only to a Huawei cabinet.

Procedure
Step 1 Install floating nuts.
1. Determine the position for installing a floating nut based on the installation plan.

NOTE

The floating nuts and screws are used together to tighten the screws.
The middle of two adjacent square holes with small spacing is the boundary of two Us. See Figure
3-1. The boundary between Us is used as the reference for calculating device installation space.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 63


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 3 Installing and Removing an RH2288H V3

Figure 3-1 Spacing of 1 U on a guide rail of a cabinet

2. Fasten one end of a floating nut to the square hole in a mounting bar at the front of the
cabinet. See step (1) in Figure 3-2.

Figure 3-2 Installing a floating nut

3. Fasten the upper end of the floating nut to the mounting bar at the front of the cabinet by
using the floating nut hook. See step (2) in Figure 3-2.
The floating nut is installed, as shown in (3) in Figure 3-2.
Step 2 Install L-shaped guide rails.
1. Place a guide rail horizontally in the designated position and keep the guide rail in
contact with the mounting bars in the cabinet. See Figure 3-3.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 64


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 3 Installing and Removing an RH2288H V3

Figure 3-3 Installing an L-shaped guide rail

2. Tighten the screws.


3. Install another guide rail on the opposite side by using the same method.
Step 3 Install the RH2288H V3.
1. At least two people are required to lift the RH2288H V3 and move it to the cabinet.
2. Place the RH2288H V3 onto the guide rails and slide it into the cabinet. See step (1) in
Figure 3-4.

Figure 3-4 Installing the RH2288H V3

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 65


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 3 Installing and Removing an RH2288H V3

3. When the two mounting ears of the RH2288H V3 come into contact the mounting bars
on the cabinet, tighten the captive screws on the mounting ears to secure the RH2288H
V3. See step (2) in Figure 3-4.
----End

3.3.2 Installing a Server on Adjustable Guide Rails


Adjustable guide rails apply to a cabinet with a distance of 543.5 mm to 848.5 mm (21.40 in.
to 33.41 in.) between the front and rear mounting bars.

Procedure
Step 1 Install guide rails.
1. Place a guide rail horizontally in the planned position and keep the guide rail in contact
with the mounting bars in the cabinet. Hook the guide rail to the cabinet. See step (1) in
Figure 3-5.
NOTE

The three holes in each mounting ear of a guide rail should be within a 1 U mark.

Figure 3-5 Installing an adjustable guide rail

2. Insert the plug into the position on the top of the mounting ear to secure the guide rail.
See step (2) in Figure 3-5.
Second square hole on the front side of the guide rail
Second square hole on the rear side of the guide rail
3. (Optional) Install an M6 screw in the first square hole at the rear of the guide rail to
secure it. See step (3) in Figure 3-5.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 66


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 3 Installing and Removing an RH2288H V3

NOTE

You can install the adjustable guide rails free from screws. You can also install M6 screws at the
rear of the adjustable guide rails to make the server more shockproof and secure.
4. Install another guide rail on the opposite side using the same method.

Step 2 Install the RH2288H V3.


1. At least two people are required to lift the RH2288H V3 and move it to the cabinet.
2. Place the RH2288H V3 onto the guide rails and slide it into the cabinet. See step (1) in
Figure 3-6.

Figure 3-6 Installing the RH2288H V3

3. When the two mounting ears of the RH2288H V3 come into contact the mounting bars
on the cabinet, tighten the captive screws on the mounting ears to secure the RH2288H
V3. See step (2) in Figure 3-6.

----End

Follow-up Procedure
Connect the power cable to the server and power on the RH2288H V3. Connect the network
cable, video graphics array (VGA) cable and USB device to the server based on site
requirements.

3.3.3 Installing the RH2288H V3 on Holding Rails

Holding rails apply to a cabinet with a distance of 610 mm to 914 mm (24.02 in. to 35.98 in.)
between the front and rear mounting bars.

Procedure
Step 1 Install the front end and rear end of the holding rail.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 67


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 3 Installing and Removing an RH2288H V3

1. Hold down the plate on the front end of the holding rail, and pull out the hook. See steps
(1) and (2) in Figure 3-7.

Figure 3-7 Installing the front and rear ends of a holding rail

2. Insert the positioning pins on the rear end of the holding rail into the square holes in the
cabinet. See step (3) in Figure 3-7.
3. Align the front end of the holding rail with the hole in the column, and push the holding
rail forward to insert it into the hole in the column. See step (4) in Figure 3-7.
4. Push the hook backwards to make the metal sheet in full contact with the column. See
step (5) in Figure 3-7.
5. (Optional) Install an M6 screw in the third square hole on the rear end of the holding rail
to secure the rail. See step (6) in Figure 3-7.
Step 2 Install the server.
1. Pull out the inner rails slightly until you hear a sound. See in Figure 3-8.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 68


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 3 Installing and Removing an RH2288H V3

Figure 3-8 Pulling out inner rails

2. Insert the server into the inner rails from top to bottom and ensure that the nail heads on
both sides of the server fit into the holes in the inner rails. See step (1) in Figure 3-9.

Figure 3-9 Installing the server

2
1

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 69


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 3 Installing and Removing an RH2288H V3

3. Push the server forward until you hear a sound, and ensure that the latches eject and
completely block the screws to fix the server to the inner guide rails. See step (2) in
Figure 3-9.
4. Press the release buttons on both sides and push the server into the cabinet until the
mounting ears are in close contact with the mounting bars of the cabinet. See steps (1)
and (2) in Figure 3-10.

Figure 3-10 Pushing a server into a cabinet

Step 3 Install a cable organizer.


1. Insert the support lever into the outer rails on both the left and right sides. See step (1) in
Figure 3-11.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 70


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 3 Installing and Removing an RH2288H V3

Figure 3-11 Installing a cable organizer

2. Insert the nail heads on the left outer rail into the holes in the outer support lever of the
cable organizer, and pull the cable organizer out to secure it. See step (2) in Figure 3-11.
3. Insert the nail heads on the left inner rail into the holes in the inner support lever of the
cable organizer, and pull the cable organizer out to secure it. See step (3) in Figure 3-11.

Step 4 Connect the power cable to the server and power on the RH2288H V3. Connect the network
cable, video graphics array (VGA) cable and USB device to the server based on site
requirements.

----End

3.4 Connecting External Cables


This topic describes how to connect cables to the server.

3.4.1 Connecting Cables to a Mouse, Keyboard, and VGA Port


After powering on the server, connect cables to a mouse, keyboard, and VGA port to set the
basic input/output system (BIOS) and RAID, and log in to the operating system (OS).

The front and rear panels of the server provide DB15 video graphics array (VGA) ports but
have no standard PS/2 port for a keyboard or mouse. You can connect a keyboard and mouse
to the USB ports on the front or rear panel based on site installation conditions. The following
describe two connection methods:

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 71


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 3 Installing and Removing an RH2288H V3

l Connect a keyboard and mouse to the USB ports.


l Connect a keyboard and mouse by using a USB-to-PS/2 cable.

Procedure
Step 1 Connect the USB connector on the PS/2 cable to the USB port on the front or rear panel of the
server.

Step 2 Connect the connectors on the other end of the PS/2 cable to the keyboard and mouse.

Step 3 Connect the DB15 connector on the VGA cable to the VGA port on the front or rear panel of
the server, and tighten the two screws on the connector to secure the cable.

Step 4 Connect the other end of the VGA cable to the VGA port on the monitor. Tighten the two
screws on the connector to secure the cable.

Figure 3-12 Connecting a USB-to-PS/2 cable and a VGA cable

----End

3.4.2 Connecting a Network Cable


Connect a network cable in the following scenarios:
l The network needs to be set up over a gigabit Ethernet (GE).
l You want to log in to the iBMC/iBMC of the server using the management network port
for device management.
l One or more network cables do not work.
l A network cable needs to be replaced if the existing network cable does not meet length
requirements after a device is replaced or moved.
Use a network cable tester to check that the new network cable works properly. Check that the
new network cable is of the same model as or compatible with the network cable to be
replaced. Determine whether they are straight-through or crossover cables.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 72


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 3 Installing and Removing an RH2288H V3

Tools
l Phillips screwdriver: used to tighten screws
l ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves: used to prevent ESD damage
l Diagonal pliers: used to trim the cable ties after binding cables
l RJ45 crimping tool: used to make network cable connectors
l Network cable tester: used to test the cable connectivity
l Multimeter: used to test the resistance

Procedure
Step 1 Check the new network cable model.

Step 2 Number the new network cable.


l The new network cable must have the same number as the one to be replaced.
l Use the same type of label for network cables. Record the name and number of the local
device to be connected on one side of the network cable, and those of the peer device on
the other side. Attach a label to the position 2 cm (0.79 in.) away from the end of a
network cable.
Step 3 Route the new network cable.
Route the new network cable in the same way (underfloor or overhead) as the network cable
to be replaced. Note the following points:
l Underfloor cabling is recommended because it is tidy and easy to route. Route cables in
the cabinet based on the installation requirements. You are advised to arrange new cables
in the same way as existing cables. Ensure that cables are routed neatly and undamaged.
l Separate network cables from power cables for routing.
l Bend a network cable with the bending radius of no less than 4 cm (1.57 in.) to prevent
damage to core wires. Check that the cable insulation layer is intact. Ensure that cables
are routed for easy maintenance and capacity expansion.
l Network cables must be bound using cable ties to ensure proper routing. Check that
network cables are bound together neatly and properly, are routed straightly and close to
each other. Cable ties must be installed at an even spacing and fastened properly.
Step 4 Remove the network cable to be replaced.
Remove the network cable from the network interface card (NIC) or board in a cabinet.
Step 5 Connect the new network cable.
Note the following:
l Connect the new network cable to the same port as the removed one.
l Install the network cable in the network port securely.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 73


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 3 Installing and Removing an RH2288H V3

Figure 3-13 Connecting a network cable to management and service network ports

Step 6 Connect the other end of the network cable to the peer network port.

Connect the other cable connector to the peer device based on the network plan. Note the
following:

l Connect the new network cable to the same port as the removed one.
l Install the network cable in the network port securely.

Step 7 Check that the new network cable is functioning properly.

Power on the device, and ping the peer device connected by the new network cable. If the
peer device cannot be pinged, check whether the network cable is damaged or the connectors
are not secured.

Step 8 Bind the new network cable with other cables.

Bind the new network cable in the same way as the existing network cables. You can also
remove all cable ties and bind all of the network cables again if necessary.

----End

3.4.3 Connecting a Cable to a 10GE Port

Connect an optical cable or SFP+ cable to a 10GE port. Before the connection, determine the
cable type and ensure that the cable to be connected is of the same model as the one to be
replaced or is compatible with the server.

Tools
l Phillips screwdriver: used to tighten screws
l ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves: used to prevent ESD damage

Procedure
Step 1 Check the new network model.

Step 2 Number the new cable.


l The new cable must have the same number as the old one.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 74


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 3 Installing and Removing an RH2288H V3

l Use the same type of labels for optical cables. Record the name and number of the local
device to be connected on one side of an optical cable and those of the peer device on the
other side. Attach a label 2 cm (0.79 in.) away from the end of an optical cable.

Step 3 Lay out the new cable.


Lay out the new cable in the same way as the old one. Note the following points:
l Lay out optical or SFP+ cables in the cabinet according to installation regulations. You
are advised to arrange new cables in the same way as existing cables. Ensure that cables
are routed neatly and intact.
l Separate optical or SFP+ cables from power and signal cables when laying out the
cables.
l Bend an optical or SFP+ cable with a bending radius of at least 4 cm (1.57 in.) to prevent
damage to core wires. Ensure that the cable is intact. Ensure that optical or SFP+ cables
are laid out for easy maintenance and capacity expansion.
l Bind optical cables with cable ties. Ensure that optical cables are routed straightly and
bound neatly and that cable ties are installed at even spacing and fastened properly.

Step 4 When you use an optical cable:


1. Remove the old optical cable.

Remove the old optical cable from the server.


2. Connect the new optical cable.
NOTE

Connect the new optical cable to the same port as the old one.
Connect the optical cable to the optical module securely.

a. Insert the optical module into the optical port. See step (1) in Figure 3-14.

Figure 3-14 Connecting an optical cable

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 75


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 3 Installing and Removing an RH2288H V3

b. Close the latch on the optical module to secure it. See step (2) in Figure 3-14.
c. Insert the optical cable into the optical module. See step (3) in Figure 3-14.
Step 5 When you use an SFP+ cable:
1. Remove the old SFP+ cable.
Gently push the power connector inwards and pull the latch out to remove the SFP+
cable. See Figure 3-15.

NOTICE
Do not directly pull the latch out.

Figure 3-15 Removing an SFP+ cable


Vendor 1 Vendor 2 Vendor 3

Vendor 4 Vendor 5

2. Connect the new SFP+ cable.


Remove the dust-proof cap on the port, and insert the cable connector into the port. See
Figure 3-16.

NOTE

When you hear a "click" and the cable cannot be pulled out, the connector is secured.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 76


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 3 Installing and Removing an RH2288H V3

Figure 3-16 Connecting an SFP+ cable

Vendor 1 Vendor 2 Vendor 3

Vendor 4 Vendor 5

Step 6 Check that the new cable is properly connected.


Power on the device, and ping the IP address of the peer device connected over the new cable.
If the peer device cannot be pinged, check that the cable is intact or the connector is securely
connected.
Step 7 Bind the new optical cable.
Bind the new optical cable in the same way as existing optical cables. You can also remove all
cable ties and bind all of the optical cables again if necessary.
----End

3.4.4 Connecting a 56G IB Cable


If a 56G IB cable is to be replaced, ensure that the new cable is of the same model as the one
to be replaced or is compatible with the server.

Tools
l Phillips screwdriver: used to tighten screws
l ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves: used to prevent ESD damage

Procedure
Step 1 Check the model of the new network.
Step 2 Number the new cable.
l The new cable must have the same number as the old one.
l Use the same type of labels for optical cables. Record the name and number of the local
device to be connected on one side of an optical cable and those of the peer device on the
other side. Attach a label 2 cm (0.79 in.) away from the end of a network cable.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 77


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 3 Installing and Removing an RH2288H V3

Step 3 Lay out the new cable.


Lay out the new cable in the same way as the old one. Note the following points:
l Lay out optical or QSFP+ cables in the cabinet by observing installation regulations. You
are advised to arrange new cables in the same way as existing cables. Ensure that cables
are routed neatly and intact.
l Separate optical or QSFP+ cables from power and signal cables when laying out the
cables.
l Bend optical or QSFP+ cables with a bending radius of at least 4 cm (1.57 in.) to prevent
damage to core wires. Lay out optical or QSFP+ cables for easy maintenance and
capacity expansion.
l Bind optical cables with cable ties. Ensure that optical cables are routed straightly and
bound neatly and that cable ties are installed at even spacing and fastened properly.

Step 4 Replace the cable.


1. Remove the old 56E IB cable.

Release the latch and remove the cable. See Figure 3-17.

Figure 3-17 Removing a 56G IB cable (using an IB NIC with two 56G ports as an
example)

2. Connect to a new 56E IB cable.

Remove the dust-proof cap on the port, and insert the cable connector into the port. See
Figure 3-18.

NOTE

When you hear a "click" and the cable cannot be pulled out, the connector is secured.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 78


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 3 Installing and Removing an RH2288H V3

Figure 3-18 Connecting a 56G IB cable (using an IB NIC with two 56G ports as an
example)

Step 5 Check that the new cable is properly connected.


Power on the server. If the LOM indicator is green, the cable is properly connected.
Step 6 Bind the new optical cable.
Bind the new optical cable in the same way as existing optical cables. You can also remove all
cable ties and bind all of the optical cables again if necessary.

----End

3.4.5 Connecting a USB Device


Check that data has been copied to the USB device to be connected.

Procedure
Step 1 Confirme the server installation position in the cabinet.

Step 2 Connect the USB storage device to the USB port on the server, as shown in Figure 3-19.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 79


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 3 Installing and Removing an RH2288H V3

Figure 3-19 Connecting a USB device

----End

3.4.6 Connecting a Serial Cable


The RH2288H V3 server provides one standard DB9 serial port on the rear, which works as
the system serial port by default. You can set it to the iBMC serial port on the iBMC CLI.

The serial port can be used in the following scenarios:


l Used as the system serial port to monitor the status of the operating system (OS).
l Used as the iBMC serial port for debugging and fault locating.

For details about the command for setting the serial port to the iBMC serial port, see the
HUAWEI Rack Server iBMC User Guide.

Tools
ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves: used to prevent ESD damage

Procedure
Step 1

NOTICE
Do not use excessive force; otherwise, the pins in the serial port may be damaged.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 80


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 3 Installing and Removing an RH2288H V3

Align the connector on the serial cable with the serial port, and insert the connector into the
serial port, as shown in Figure 3-20.

Figure 3-20 Connecting a serial cable

Step 2 Tighten the screws on the connector to secure the serial cable.

----End

3.4.7 Connecting a Power Cable


The following describes how to connect AC and DC power cables. Connect AC or DC power
cables based on the PSU type.
Before connecting power cables, ensure that the server and its internal components have been
installed, and the PGND cable is connected to server (For the RH2288H V3, which does not
provide ground terminals, connect the PGND cable to the cabinet where the server is located).
Use dedicated power cables to ensure equipment and personal safety. Power cables must be
securely connected. Power cables are used only for dedicated servers. Do not use them for
other devices.

Tools
ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves: used to prevent ESD damage

Connecting an AC Power Cable


Step 1 Wear an ESD wrist strap.

Step 2 Connect one end of the AC power cable to the power port on the PSU of the server. See
Figure 3-21.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 81


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 3 Installing and Removing an RH2288H V3

Figure 3-21 Connecting an AC power cable

Step 3 Close the latch on the PSU.

Step 4 Insert the other end of the AC power cable into the AC power socket on the cabinet. The AC
power socket is located horizontally at the rear of the cabinet. Select a jack on the power
socket for connection.
Step 5 Bind the power cable to the cable trough using cable ties.

----End

Connecting DC Power Cables


Step 1 Wear an ESD wrist strap.

Step 2 Connect the power cables to the wiring terminals on the PSU. The power cables are connected
properly once they are latched. See Figure 3-22.
l Connect the OT terminal on the negative power cable to the NEG(-) wiring terminal on
the PSU.
l Connect the OT terminal on the positive power cable to the RTN(+) wiring terminal on
the PSU.
l Connect the OT terminal on the ground cable to the ground terminal on the PSU.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 82


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 3 Installing and Removing an RH2288H V3

Figure 3-22 Connecting DC power cables

Step 3 Connect the other end of the power cable to the DC power distribution frame (PDF) based on
the power cable connection rules.
Step 4 Bind the power cable to the cable trough using cable ties.

----End

3.4.8 Laying Out Cables


Basic Rules
l Lay out and bind cables of different types of cables (such as power and signal cables)
separately. Ensure that the distance between power cables and signal cables is longer
than or equal to 30 mm (1.18 in.) when you lay out the cables in parallel.
l Lay out cables of the same type in the same direction. Cables near each other can be
routed in crossover mode.
l If you cannot identify cables using the cable labels, attach an engineering label to each
cable.
l Protect cables from burrs, heat sinks, and active accessories, which may damage the
insulation layers of cables.
l Ensure that the length of cable ties for binding cables is appropriate. Do not connect two
or more cable ties together for binding cables. After binding cables properly, trim off the
excess lengths of the cable ties and ensure that the cuts are neat and smooth.
l Ensure that cables are properly routed, supported, or fixed within the cable troughs
inside the cabinet to prevent loose connections and cable damage.
l Coil any surplus lengths of cables and bind them to proper positions inside the cabinet.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 83


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 3 Installing and Removing an RH2288H V3

l Route cables straightly and bind them neatly. The bending radius of a cable varies with
the position where the cable is bent.
If you need to bend a cable in its middle, the bending radius must be at least twice
the diameter of the cable.
If you need to bend a cable at the output terminal of a connector, the bending radius
must be at least five times the cable diameter, and the cable must be bound before
bending.
Do not use cable ties at a place where the cables are bent. Otherwise, the cables
may break.

Common Cable Routing Methods


The methods of routing cables inside a cabinet are described as follows:
l Determine overhead cabling and underfloor cabling for power cables based on specific
conditions of the equipment room. For example, take into consideration the AC power
distribution frame (PDF), surge protector, and terminal block.
l Determine overhead cabling and underfloor cabling for service data cables based on
specific conditions of the equipment room.
l Place the connectors of all service Ethernet cables at the bottom of the cabinet in order so
that the connectors are difficult to reach.
l Ensure that high-density cables are not bound in crossover mode. This helps you
identify, insert, or remove a server.

Cable Routing Rules

NOTICE
To ensure optimal heat dissipation, do not block the air exhaust vents of PSUs.

3.4.9 Verifying Cable Connections

CAUTION
Before verifying cable connections, ensure that the power is off. Any incorrect or loose
connection may cause personal injury or equipment damage.

Table 3-3 lists the cable connection checklist.

Table 3-3 Cable connection checklist


Item Description

Power cable The power cable is connected correctly to the rear of the chassis.

Network cable Network cables are connected correctly to the management Ethernet
ports or service Ethernet ports on the rear panel of the chassis.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 84


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 3 Installing and Removing an RH2288H V3

Item Description

Ground cable The server is grounded through the cabinet. Ensure that the cabinet is
properly grounded.

3.5 Removing the RH2288H V3


At least two people are required to move an RH2288H V3 because it is heavy. Data on the
RH2288H V3 has been backed up before it is removed.

Tools
l ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves: used to prevent ESD damage
l Screwdriver: used to loosen the screws on the panel

Procedure
Step 1 Wear an ESD wrist strap. For details, see 1 Safety Instructions.
Step 2 Power off the RH2288H V3.
Step 3 Disconnect all power cables and signal cables from the RH2288H V3.
Step 4 Loosen the captive screws on the RH2288H V3 panel using a screwdriver. See step (1) in
Figure 3-23.

Figure 3-23 Removing a server

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 85


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 3 Installing and Removing an RH2288H V3

Step 5 Pull out the RH2288H V3 along the guide rails away from the cabinet. See step (2) in Figure
3-23.
Step 6 Place the removed RH2288H V3 on an ESD platform for maintenance.

----End

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 86


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 4 Powering On and Off the Server

4 Powering On and Off the Server

About This Chapter

This topic describes the procedures for powering on and off the server.
4.1 Powering On the Server
4.2 Powering Off the Server

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 87


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 4 Powering On and Off the Server

4.1 Powering On the Server


Power on the server using the iBMC WebUI. Before powering on the server, you need to
obtain the IP address of the iBMC management network port, and the user name and
password for logging in to the iBMC WebUI. For details about how to obtain the IP address
for the management network port and how to operate the iBMC, see HUAWEI Rack Server
iBMC User Guide.

Before powering on the server, pay attention to the following precautions:

l Before the power-on, ensure that the power supply units (PSUs) are switched off, all
cables are connected correctly, and the power supply voltage meets the requirements.
l During the power-on, do not remove or insert hard disks or cables, such as the network
cable and Console port cable.
l After the server is powered off, wait for at least 1 minute and then switch on the PSUs
again.

The methods for powering on the server are as follows, depending on the power status of
power supply units (PSUs):

l If PSUs are properly installed and not powered on, power on the server as follows:
Connect the external power supply to PSUs. Then the server will power on with PSUs.
NOTE
The default value of Power Strategy is Turn on, which indicates that the server automatically
powers on after power is supplied to PSUs. To change the value of Power Strategy, log in to the
iBMC WebUI and choose Power > Power Control.
l If PSUs are powered on and the server is in the standby state, power on the server as
follows:
NOTE
When the power indicator is steady yellow, the server is in the standby state.
Press the power button on the front panel to power on the server. For details about
the power button position, see 2.2 Appearance.
Power on the server using the iBMC WebUI. For details, see Power on the server
using the iBMC WebUI.
Power on the server using the iBMC command-line interface (CLI) in remote
management mode.
Log in to the iBMC CLI. For details, see 9.3 Logging In to the iBMC CLI.
Run the ipmcset -d powerstate -v 1 command on the iBMC CLI to power on the
server remotely.

Procedure
Power on the server using the iBMC WebUI.
1 Log in to the iBMC WebUI. For details, see 9.2 Logging In to the iBMC WebUI.
2 Choose Power > Power Control.
The Power Control page is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-1.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 88


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 4 Powering On and Off the Server

Figure 4-1 Power Control page

3 Click Power On. In the displayed dialog box, click OK to power on the server.

----End

Verification
Check the indicator status after the server is powered on.

4.2 Powering Off the Server


Power off the server using the iBMC WebUI. After the power-off, all services and programs
running on the server will stop running. Stop all services and programs or switch them to
other servers before powering off the server. Before powering off the server, you need to
obtain the IP address of the iBMC management network port, and the user name and
password for logging in to the iBMC WebUI. For details about how to obtain the IP address
for the management network port and how to operate the iBMC, see HUAWEI Rack Server
iBMC User Guide.

Before powering off the server, pay attention to the following precautions:
l Before powering off the server, ensure that server data has been saved and hard disk
services have been stopped. Do not forcibly power off when read and write operations
are being performed on hard disks. Otherwise, bad sectors may occur, compromising
data sources.
l After the server is powered off, wait for at least 1 minute and then switch on the PSUs
again.

The methods for powering off the server are as follows:

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 89


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 4 Powering On and Off the Server

l Hold down the power button to have the server enter the standby state.
NOTE
When the power indicator is steady yellow, the server is in the standby state.
Connect the server to a video display, keyboard, and mouse using cables, and shut
down the operating system.
Hold down the power button on the front panel until the server is powered off. For
details about the power button position, see 2.2 Appearance.
Log in to the Remote Virtual Console of the server, and shut down the operating
system.
For details about how to log in to the Remote Virtual Console, see 9.5 Logging In
to the Remote Virtual Console.
Power off the server using the iBMC WebUI. For details, see Power off the server
using the iBMC WebUI.
Power off the server using the iBMC CLI.
Log in to the iBMC CLI. For details, see 9.3 Logging In to the iBMC CLI.
Run the ipmcset -d powerstate -v 0 command on the iBMC CLI.
l Power off the server completely.
If the server has been powered off and is in the standby state, remove the power cable to
disconnect the external power supply. After that, the server is powered off completely.

Procedure
Power off the server using the iBMC WebUI.
1 Log in to the iBMC WebUI. For details, see 9.2 Logging In to the iBMC WebUI.
2 Choose Power > Power Control.
The Power Control page is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-2.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 90


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 4 Powering On and Off the Server

Figure 4-2 Power Control page

3 Click Power Off. In the displayed dialog box, click OK to power off the server.
----End

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 91


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 5 Configuring the RH2288H V3

5 Configuring the RH2288H V3

About This Chapter

This topic describes how to configure the RH2288H V3 after it is installed.


5.3 Checking the RH2288H V3
5.4 Configuring RAID
5.5 Configuring the BIOS
5.6 Changing an iBMC User Password
5.7 Setting the Management Network Port IP Address
5.8 Installing an OS
5.9 (Optional) Configuring the Boot from iSCSI Function for an SP230 NIC

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 92


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 5 Configuring the RH2288H V3

5.1 Default Information


Table 5-1 lists the default user name, password, and IP address used for configuring the
server.

Table 5-1 Default information


Item Parameter Default Value

iBMC management IP address and subnet l Default IP address: 192.168.2.100


network port mask of the l Default subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
information management network
port

iBMC management User name and l Default user name: root


system login password l Default password: Huawei12#$
information

BIOS Password The default BIOS password is


Huawei12#$ for the American keyboard,
Huqzei&34 for the French keyboard,
and Huawei12$ for the English
keyboard.
NOTE
When entering the BIOS password on the
remote virtual console:
l If the keyboard type configured in the OS
is the same as the actual keyboard type,
enter the password by using the actual
keyboard.
l If the keyboard type configured in the OS
is different from the actual keyboard type,
enter the password by using the keyboard
configured in the OS.

5.2 Configuration Process


Figure 5-1 shows the process for configuring the server.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 93


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 5 Configuring the RH2288H V3

Figure 5-1 Process for configuring the server

Table 5-2 describes the procedure for configuring the server.

Table 5-2 Procedure for configuring the server


Step Description

Check the server. l Check the board versions.


l Check for and clear server alarms.

Configure RAID. Configure RAID for the server based on site


requirements.
NOTE
The RH2288H V3 supports the following RAID controller cards:
SR320 (LSI SAS2208), SR420 (LSI SAS2208), SR120 (LSI
SAS2308), SR130 (LSI SAS3008), SR430C (1 GB/2 GB, LSI
SAS3108), SP435 (PM8060), and SR135 (PM8068)

Configure the basic input/ Configure the server BIOS, including the boot mode,
output system (BIOS). network drive, preboot execution environment (PXE)
options of the network interface card (NIC), and BIOS
password.

Change the user password for Change the default password for iBMC.
iBMC.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 94


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 5 Configuring the RH2288H V3

Step Description

Install an operating system For details, see HUAWEI Server OS Installation Guide.
(OS).

5.3 Checking the RH2288H V3


Log in to the iBMC WebUI or CLI to check the health status of the RH2288H V3. Ensure that
its health status meets the environment requirements for software installation.
Table 5-3 describes the default information for logging in to the RH2288H V3 iBMC WebUI
or CLI. For details about the CLI, see HUAWEI Rack Server iBMC User Guide.

Table 5-3 Default information


Item Parameter Default Value

iBMC management IP address and subnet l Default IP address: 192.168.2.100


network port mask of the l Default subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
information management network
port

iBMC management User name and l Default user name: root


system login password l Default password: Huawei12#$
information

BIOS Password The default BIOS password is


Huawei12#$ for the American keyboard,
Huqzei&34 for the French keyboard,
and Huawei12$ for the English
keyboard.
NOTE
When entering the BIOS password on the
remote virtual console:
l If the keyboard type configured in the OS
is the same as the actual keyboard type,
enter the password by using the actual
keyboard.
l If the keyboard type configured in the OS
is different from the actual keyboard type,
enter the password by using the keyboard
configured in the OS.

Workflow
Check the RH2288H V3 by following the sequence described in Figure 5-2. Determine the
check method based on site requirements.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 95


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 5 Configuring the RH2288H V3

Figure 5-2 Process for checking the RH2288H V3

Procedure
l Check indicator status.
Observe the RH2288H V3 indicator status, and check that hardware devices are properly
operating.
For details, see 2.4 Indicators and Buttons.
l Check the RH2288H V3 using the iBMC WebUI.
a. Log in to the iBMC WebUI. For details, see 9.2 Logging In to the iBMC WebUI.
NOTE

You are advised to change the default password when you log in to iBMC for the first time.
For details, see 5.6 Changing an iBMC User Password.
b. View the RH2288H V3 version information.
Choose System > Firmware Upgrade, and view server versions, as shown in
Figure 5-3.
Check that the RH2288H V3 versions meet site requirements.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 96


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 5 Configuring the RH2288H V3

Figure 5-3 Querying version information

c. View the RH2288H V3 health status and alarms.


Choose Information > Information Summary, and view server health status, as
shown in Figure 5-4.

Figure 5-4 Querying the health status for the RH2288H V3

d. Clear alarms. For details, see HUAWEI Rack Server Alarm Handling (iBMC).
NOTE
If the query result in c indicates that no alarm is generated for the server, skip this step.
l Check the RH2288H V3 using the iBMC CLI.
a. Log in to the iBMC CLI.
i. Set an IP address for the PC, and ensure that the IP address is on the same
network segment as the iBMC management network port.
ii. Connect the PC to the RH2288H V3 iBMC management network port by
using a network cable.
iii. Run the Secure Shell (SSH) tool on the PC, and enter the IP address of the
iBMC management network port, user name, and password to log in.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 97


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 5 Configuring the RH2288H V3

NOTE

By default, SSH is used to log in to iBMC. If the SSH service is disabled, enable it by
choosing Config > Service Settings on the iBMC WebUI.
b. View the RH2288H V3 version information.

Check that the RH2288H V3 versions meet site requirements.


Hi1710 / # ipmcget -d v
------------------- iBMC INFO -------------------
IPMC CPU: Hi1710
IPMI Version: 2.0
CPLD Version: (U46)1.05
Active iBMC Version: (U25)1.26
Active iBMC Built: 08:26:05 Dec 23 2014
Backup iBMC Version: 1.26
SDK Version: 1.47
SDK Built: 08:28:02 Dec 19 2014
Active Uboot Version: 1.1.29 (Oct 13 2014 - 15:23:00)
Backup Uboot Version: 1.1.29 (Oct 13 2014 - 15:23:00)
----------------- Product INFO -----------------
Product ID: 0x0001
Product Name: RH2288H
Product Version: V3
BIOS Version: (U47)1.19
-------------- Mother Board INFO ---------------
Mainboard BoardID: 0x000f
Mainboard PCB: .B
------------------- NIC INFO -------------------
SM211 BoardID: 0x0017
SM211 PCB: .A
--------------- Riser Card INFO ----------------
BC11PERK BoardID: 0x0084
BC11PERL BoardID: 0x0085
-------------- HDD Backplane INFO --------------
BC11EHBD BoardID: 0x0079
BC11EHBD PCB: .A
BC11EHBD CPLD Version: (U3)1.02

n CPLD Version: indicates the current complex programmable logical device


(CPLD) version of the RH2288H V3.
n BIOS Version: indicates the basic input/output system (BIOS) version of the
RH2288H V3.
n Active iBMC Version: indicates the active iBMC version of the RH2288H
V3.
n Backup iBMC Version: indicates the backup iBMC version of the RH2288H
V3.
c. Query the health status for the RH2288H V3.
iBMC / # ipmcget -d health
System in health state

n If the message "System in health state" is displayed, no further action is


required.
n If an alarm is generated, clear the alarm by performing d and e.
d. Query alarms for the RH2288H V3.
iBMC:/->ipmcget -d healthevents
System in health state

e. Clear alarms. For details, see HUAWEI Rack Server Alarm Handling (iBMC).

----End

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 98


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 5 Configuring the RH2288H V3

5.4 Configuring RAID


Before Configuring RAID, you need to obtain the IP address of the iBMC management
network port, and the user name and password for logging in to the iBMC WebUI. For details
about how to obtain the IP address for the management network port and how to operate the
iBMC, see HUAWEI Rack Server iBMC User Guide.

Procedure
View the RAID controller card information on the iBMC WebUI.
1 Log in to the iBMC WebUI.
For details, see 9.2 Logging In to the iBMC WebUI.
2 Choose Information on the menu bar and choose Component Info or System Info in
the navigation tree. The Component Info or System Info page is displayed.
3 View the RAID controller card information, as shown in Figure 5-5 or Figure 5-6.

Figure 5-5 Component information example

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 99


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 5 Configuring the RH2288H V3

Figure 5-6 System information example

NOTE
The preceding information is for reference only. The actual information displayed may differ.
Configuring RAID
4 Configure RAID.
The configuration procedure varies according to the RAID controller card type. For
details about how to configure RAID, see HUAWEI V2&V3 Server RAID Controller
Card User Guide.
Supported RAID controller cards: SR320 (LSI SAS2208), SR420 (LSI SAS2208),
SR120 (LSI SAS2308), SR130 (LSI SAS3008), SR430C (1 GB/2 GB, LSI SAS3108),
SP435 (PM8060), and SR135(PM8068)
----End

5.5 Configuring the BIOS


Configure the BIOS of the RH2288H V3, including setting the server boot mode, selecting
PXE as a boot option, enabling the PXE function for a network port, and setting the BIOS
password and language. For details about how to configure the BIOS, see HUAWEI Server
Grantley Platform BIOS Parameter Reference.

Workflow
Figure 5-7 shows the process for configuring the BIOS.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 100


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 5 Configuring the RH2288H V3

Figure 5-7 Process for configuring the BIOS

Procedure
Restart the server.

1 Click on the menu bar of the remote virtual console.

For details about how to log in to the remote virtual console, see 9.5 Logging In to the
Remote Virtual Console.
2 Select Reset
The system displays "Are you sure to perform this operation?"
3 Click Yes.
The server restarts.
4 Press Delete repeatedly when the screen shown in the following figure is displayed
during server startup.

The BIOS Setup Utility starts.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 101


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 5 Configuring the RH2288H V3

NOTE
You can also press the following shortcut keys on the BIOS startup screen as required:
Press F5 to select the keyboard type (American or French keyboard).
Press Delete or F4 to go to the BIOS Setup Utility screen is displayed.
Press F11 or F3 to go the boot manager screen for selecting boot options.
Press F12 to boot from the network.

Figure 5-8 BIOS startup screen

5 Enter a BIOS password when prompted. The screen for setting the BIOS is displayed.
NOTE

The default BIOS password is Huawei12#$ for the American keyboard, Huqzei&34 for the
French keyboard, and Huawei12$ for the English keyboard. To ensure system security, you are
advised to change the default BIOS password after the first login. For details, see Set the BIOS
password.
When entering the BIOS password on the remote virtual console:
If the keyboard type configured in the OS is the same as the actual keyboard type, enter the
password by using the actual keyboard.
If the keyboard type configured in the OS is different from the actual keyboard type, enter
the password by using the keyboard configured in the OS.
You are advised to regularly change the supervisor password for security purposes.
The server is locked after three consecutive failures with wrong passwords. You can restart the
server to unlock it.
Set the server boot mode.
6 Choose Boot > Boot Type and press Enter.
The Boot screen is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-9.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 102


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 5 Configuring the RH2288H V3

Figure 5-9 Boot

7 In the displayed dialog box, select Dual Boot Type, Legacy Boot Type, or UEFI Type,
and press Enter.
8 Choose Boot Type Order and press Enter.
The Boot Type Order screen is displayed.

NOTE
The default boot sequence is as follows: Hard Disk Drive, CD/DVD-ROM Drive, PXE, and finally
Others.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 103


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 5 Configuring the RH2288H V3

Figure 5-10 Boot Type Order

Select PXE as a boot option.


9 Select boot options to be configured, and press + or - to change the boot sequence. Set
the first boot option to PXE.
The option at the top of the boot option list is the first boot option, and the one at the
bottom is the last boot option.
To move a boot option up, press +.
To move a boot option down, press -.
Enable the PXE function for a network port.
10 Choose Advanced > PXE Configuration and press Enter.
The PXE Configuration screen is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-11.

NOTE
The PXE Configuration screen displays four network ports, in which PXE1 is Enabled and other
network ports are Disabled by default.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 104


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 5 Configuring the RH2288H V3

Figure 5-11 PXE Configuration

11 Select the network port to be configured, and press Enter.


12 Choose Enabled from the shortcut menu and press Enter to enable the PXE function for
the network port.
Set the BIOS password.
13 Select the Security tab.
The Security screen is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-12.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 105


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 5 Configuring the RH2288H V3

Figure 5-12 Security

14 Select Set Supervisor Password and press Enter. Set a login password for the super
administrator.

Before changing the supervisor password, you need to enter the current supervisor
password. The server is locked after three consecutive failures with wrong passwords.
Restart the server to unlock it.

NOTE

The default BIOS password is Huawei12#$ for the American keyboard, Huqzei&34 for the
French keyboard, and Huawei12$ for the English keyboard.
When entering the BIOS password on the remote virtual console:
n If the keyboard type configured in the OS is the same as the actual keyboard type, enter
the password by using the actual keyboard.
n If the keyboard type configured in the OS is different from the actual keyboard type,
enter the password by using the keyboard configured in the OS.
The supervisor password must be a string of 8 to 16 characters, including special characters
(including spaces) and at least two types of the following characters: uppercase letters,
lowercase letters, and digits.
A new password cannot be the same as one of the previous five passwords.
After the supervisor password is set, the following menu items are displayed:
n Clear Supervisor Password
n Power on Password
15 Press F10.
The Exit Saving changes? dialog box is displayed.
16 Select Yes to save the settings.

----End

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 106


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 5 Configuring the RH2288H V3

5.6 Changing an iBMC User Password


Change the default password promptly and change the user password periodically to ensure
system security. The following describes how to change a user password on the iBMC
WebUI. For details about how to change a password on the iBMC CLI, see HUAWEI Rack
Server iBMC User Guide.

Table 5-4 lists the default iBMC user name and password.

Table 5-4 Default user name and password


Default User Name Description
and Password

l User name: root The default iBMC user belongs to the administrator group and has
l Password: full rights to access all iBMC resources and perform all
Huawei12#$ operations.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the iBMC WebUI over a network port. For details, see 9.2 Logging In to the iBMC
WebUI.

Step 2 Choose Config > Security Enhance.

Step 3 Select Enable for Password Complexity Check.


The system will perform a password complexity check when a new password is set.

Step 4 Choose Config > Local User, as shown in Figure 5-13.

Figure 5-13 Local User page

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 107


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 5 Configuring the RH2288H V3

Step 5 Click next to the user whose password needs to be changed.

Step 6 Change the password as prompted.


l When the password complexity check function is disabled, the password can be empty or
a string of any characters fewer than 20 characters.
l When the password complexity check function is enabled, the password must meet the
following requirements:
Must contain 8 to 20 characters.
Must contain at least one space or one of the following special characters:
`~!@#$%^&*()-_=+\|[{}];:'",<.>/?
Must contain at least two types of the following characters:
n Uppercase letters
n Lowercase letters
n Digits
Must not be same as the user name or the reverse of the user name.

----End

5.7 Setting the Management Network Port IP Address


Set the management network IP address through the iBMC WebUI, BIOS, and LCD of the
iBMC. You can also set the IP address by running the ipaddr command on the iBMC CLI of
theiBMC. For details, see HUAWEI Rack Server iBMC User Guide.
Table 5-5 lists the default data for setting the management network IP address.

Table 5-5 Default information


Item Parameter Default Value

iBMC management IP address and subnet l Default IP address: 192.168.2.100


network port mask of the l Default subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
information management network
port

iBMC management User name and l Default user name: root


system login password l Default password: Huawei12#$
information

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 108


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 5 Configuring the RH2288H V3

Item Parameter Default Value

BIOS Password The default BIOS password is


Huawei12#$ for the American keyboard,
Huqzei&34 for the French keyboard,
and Huawei12$ for the English
keyboard.
NOTE
When entering the BIOS password on the
remote virtual console:
l If the keyboard type configured in the OS
is the same as the actual keyboard type,
enter the password by using the actual
keyboard.
l If the keyboard type configured in the OS
is different from the actual keyboard type,
enter the password by using the keyboard
configured in the OS.

Procedure
l Set the IP address of the management network port on the iBMC WebUI.
a. Log in to the server iBMC WebUI.
For details, see 9.2 Logging In to the iBMC WebUI.
b. Choose Config > Network Settings.
The Network Settings page is displayed.
c. Set an IP address for the management network port, as shown in Figure 5-14.

Figure 5-14 Setting an IP address for the management network port

d. Click Save.
No further action is required.
l Set the IP address in the BIOS.
a. Click on the menu bar of the remote virtual console.
For details about how to log in to the remote virtual console, see 9.5 Logging In to
the Remote Virtual Console.
b. Select Reset.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 109


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 5 Configuring the RH2288H V3

The system displays "Are you sure to perform this operation?"


c. Click Yes.
The server restarts.
d. Press Delete repeatedly when the screen shown in the following figure is displayed
during server startup.

Figure 5-15 BIOS startup screen

e. Enter a BIOS password as prompted. The screen for setting the BIOS is displayed.
f. Choose Advanced > IPMI iBMC Configuration and press Enter.
The IPMI iBMC Configuration screen is displayed.
g. Select iBMC Configuration and press Enter.
The iBMC Configuration screen is displayed, showing information about the IP
address of the iBMC network port. See Figure 5-16.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 110


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 5 Configuring the RH2288H V3

Figure 5-16 iBMC Configuration

h. Select IP Address in IPV4 configuration and press Enter. On the configuration


screen, set the IPv4 address of the iBMC management network port, as shown in
Figure 5-17.

Figure 5-17 Setting the IPv4 address of the iBMC management network port

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 111


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 5 Configuring the RH2288H V3

i. Set the parameter in IPV4 configuration and IPV6 Configuration for the iBMC
management network port in the same way.
j. Press F10 to save settings and exit.
l Set the IP address by using the LCD.
a. On the LCD, click the Setting tab.
The Setting screen is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-18.

Figure 5-18 Setting

b. Click the Mgmt Port tab.


The Mgmt Port screen is displayed.
c. Set the IP address of the management network port.
NOTE

The soft keyboard is displayed after you click the text box. You can use the soft keyboard to set
the IP address or click Cancel to return to the Mgmt Port screen.

----End

5.8 Installing an OS
The RH2288H V3 is compatible with different types of OSs, including Windows, SUSE
Linux Enterprise Server (SLES), and Red Hat Enterprise Linux (RHEL). For details, see
Huawei Server Compatibility Checker.
The OS installation method varies according to the OS type. For details about the installation
procedure, see HUAWEI Server OS Installation Guide.

5.9 (Optional) Configuring the Boot from iSCSI Function


for an SP230 NIC

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 112


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 5 Configuring the RH2288H V3

An SP230 supports boot from PXE or iSCSI. Boot from PXE is enabled by default. To boot
from iSCSI, enable it first.

NOTE
Before you configure the server to boot from iSCSI, ensure that the operating system (OS) of the server
supports the iSCSI protocol stack and has the iSCSI driver.

Before configuring the boot from iSCSI function, load the optional ROM for iSCSI. For
details, see "Upgrading the Intel X540 NIC Firmware" in the HUAWEI Server Firmware
Upgrade Guide.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 113


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 6 Software and Configuration Utility

6 Software and Configuration Utility

About This Chapter

6.1 BIOS
6.2 iBMC
6.3 Upgrading Software

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 114


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 6 Software and Configuration Utility

6.1 BIOS
The basic input/output system (BIOS) is basic software code loaded to the computer hardware
system. The BIOS is running at the abstraction layer between the computer hardware system
and the OS. It is used to configure hardware to prepare for running the OS. Figure 6-1 shows
the BIOS position in the system.

Figure 6-1 BIOS position in the system

The BIOS performs power-on self-test (POST), detects input/output devices, identifies boot
devices, and initializes memory. The BIOS also provides advanced configuration and power
interface (ACPI) and hot swap. The BIOS is stored in the serial peripheral interface (SPI)
flash memory.

The RH2288H V3 server offers a Huawei's proprietary, patented BIOS that uses the Intel
Grantley platform and is developed based on the Insyde code base. The BIOS is customizable
and scalable, and provides a variety of in-band and out-of-band configuration functions.

For details about the BIOS, see HUAWEI Server Grantley Platform BIOS Parameter
Reference.

6.2 iBMC
The Intelligent Baseboard Management Controller (iBMC) is a Huawei's proprietary system
that remotely manages servers. iBMC complies with Intelligent Platform Management
Interface (IPMI) 2.0 and Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) standards and
supports various functions, including keyboard, video, and mouse (KVM) redirection, text
console redirection, remote virtual media, and hardware monitoring and management.

iBMC provides the following functions:

l Remote control
iBMC controls the servers using the keyboard, video, and mouse (KVM), serial over
LAN (SOL), and virtual media functions.
l Alarm management
iBMC receives and handles the alarms reported by the field replacement units (FRUs).

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 115


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 6 Software and Configuration Utility

l Status monitoring
iBMC monitors the operating status of the FRUs.
l Device information management
iBMC provides the function of querying the information about the device version,
model, and asset information.
l Heat dissipation control
iBMC dynamically adjusts the rotational speed of the fans based on the ambient
temperature and the workload.
l IPMItool for device management
iBMC supports the commands released by the IPMItool.
l Support for management over the WebUI
iBMC provides a user-friendly and simple Web interface for ease of management. On the
Web interface, you can perform setting and querying tasks quickly.
l Centralized account management
iBMC stores user accounts on the Active Directory server in a centralized manner and
directs the authentication to the server. In this way, you can log in to the management
system using a domain account.
For details about iBMC, see HUAWEI Rack Server iBMC User Guide.

6.3 Upgrading Software


NOTE
Upgrade server drivers, firmware, or management software if the current versions cannot meet requirements.

Obtaining the Upgrade Package and Documents


Obtain the upgrade package from http://e.huawei.com/en/.

Table 6-1 Preparing for the upgrade


Upgrade Package Document

Download a driver or firmware upgrade l Release Notes


package of the required version. The l HUAWEI Server Firmware Upgrade
following are upgrade package examples: Guide
l iBMC management software: RH2288H l FusionServer Tools V100R002 uMate
V3-iBMC-V191.zip User Guide
l BIOS firmware: RH2288H V3-BIOS- l HUAWEI Rack Server Upgrade Guide
V169.zip (iBMC)
l Driver: FusionServer iDriver-Windows- l Driver Version Mapping
Driver-V304.zip
Download path: Support > Downloads >
l RAID controller card firmware: IT > Server > FusionServer > Rack
FusionServer-RAID card-FW-V101.zip Server
Download path: Support > Downloads >
IT > Server > FusionServer > Rack
Server

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 116


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 6 Software and Configuration Utility

Upgrading Firmware or Management Software


Upgrade server firmware or management software using one of the following methods:
l Upgrade iBMC using the iBMC WebUI.
a. Obtain the upgrade package from http://e.huawei.com/en/.
b. Log in to the iBMC WebUI and choose System > Firmware Upgrade.
The Firmware Upgrade page is displayed.
c. In the Firmware Upgrade area, click Browse. In the displayed dialog box, select
the local directory for storing the upgrade package image.hpm.
d. Click Open.
e. The Firmware Upgrade page is displayed.
f. Select Immediately restart automatically.
g. Click Start Update.
h. Click Yes.
i. After the OS is restarted, log in to the iBMC WebUI again.
j. Repeat b to i to upgrade the originally active image of iBMC.
For details, see HUAWEI Rack Server Upgrade Guide (iBMC).
l Upgrade the BIOS using the iBMC WebUI.
a. Obtain the upgrade package from http://e.huawei.com/en/.
b. Log in to the iBMC WebUI and choose System > Firmware Upgrade.
The Firmware Upgrade page is displayed.
c. In the Firmware Upgrade area, click Browse. In the displayed dialog box, select
the local directory for storing the upgrade package biosimage.hpm.
d. Click Open.
e. The Firmware Upgrade page is displayed.
f. Select Immediately restart automatically.
g. Click Start Update.
NOTE
Do not restart the OS or power on, power off, or reset the server during the BIOS upgrade.
h. Click Yes.
i. Choose Power > Power Control and click Forced System Reset.
A dialog box is displayed.
j. Click OK.
For details, see HUAWEI Rack Server Upgrade Guide (iBMC).
l Upgrade firmware using the iBMC WebUI.
a. Obtain the upgrade package from http://e.huawei.com/en/.
b. Log in to the iBMC WebUI and choose System > Firmware Upgrade.
The Firmware Upgrade page is displayed.
c. In the Firmware Upgrade area, click Browse and select the local directory for
storing the upgrade package.
For example, for fan module firmware V207, the upgrade package generated after
decompression is Fan_V207.hpm.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 117


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 6 Software and Configuration Utility

d. Click Open.
e. The Firmware Upgrade page is displayed.
f. Select Immediately restart automatically.
g. Click Start Update.
h. Click Yes.
For details, see HUAWEI Server Firmware Upgrade Guide.
l Upgrade the BIOS, CPLD, and iBMC using the FusionServer Tools uMate.
a. Log in to http://e.huawei.com/en/, choose Support > Downloads > IT > Server >
Taishan > FusionServer Tools, and download the uMate package of the latest
version.
b. On the uMate main window, click Firmware Upgrade, enter server information,
and click Next to start discovering servers.
c. On the Select Upgrade Device Type page, select Upgrade by iBMC.
d. Click Select and select an upgrade package.
e. Select the server to be upgraded and click Next.
For details, see FusionServer Tools V2R2 uMate User Guide.
l Burn an upgrade package on the OS.
Download the firmware upgrade package to the local PC, decompress it to the root
directory, and program the firmware on the OS. For example, an upgrade package for
RAID controller card firmware is FusionServer-RAID card-FW-V101.zip.
For details, see HUAWEI Server Firmware Upgrade Guide.

Upgrading Drivers
If the existing driver versions on a server are not those specified in the Driver Version
Mapping, install drivers of the required versions. Otherwise, the server may operate
abnormally. Obtain the required driver installation package from Huawei Server
Compatibility Checker. For example, the V304 driver package for Windows is
FusionServer iDriver-Windows-Driver-V304.zip.
The driver upgrade procedure varies according to the OS type and version. For details, see
HUAWEI Server OS Installation Guide.

Supported OSs
To query the OS versions supported by the server, use the Huawei Server Compatibility
Checker.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 118


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 7 Replacing Parts

7 Replacing Parts

About This Chapter

This topic describes the replaceable parts of the RH2288H V3 and how to replace them.

NOTICE
l Ensure that the obtained spare parts are compatible and function properly before any
replacement. For details about parts compatibility, see Huawei Server Compatibility
Checker.
l After parts replacement, the software, firmware, and CPLDs on the new components must
be upgraded to the version used in the customer environment or to the latest version. It is
recommended that the version be upgraded to the version used in the customer
environment. For details, see the HUAWEI Rack Server Upgrade Guide (iBMC) and
HUAWEI Server Firmware Upgrade Guide.
l After the components are replaced, restore their configurations (including BMC, BIOS,
and RAID configurations) on the customer live network.

7.1 Replaceable Parts


7.2 Tool Preparations
7.3 Removing the Front Bezel
7.4 (Optional) Installing the Front Bezel
7.5 Removing a Hard Disk
7.6 Installing a Hard Disk
7.7 Removing an NVMe PCIe SSD
7.8 Installing an NVMe PCIe SSD
7.9 Removing a PSU
7.10 Installing a PSU

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 119


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 7 Replacing Parts

7.11 Removing the Chassis Cover


7.12 Installing the Chassis Cover
7.13 Removing the Air Duct
7.14 Installing the Air Duct
7.15 Removing a Fan Module
7.16 Installing a Fan Module
7.17 Removing an Internal Cable
7.18 Installing an Internal Cable
7.19 Removing the Riser Card
7.20 Installing a Riser Card
7.21 Removing a PCIe Card
7.22 Installing a PCIe Card
7.23 Removing the TPM
7.24 Installing the TPM
7.25 Removing the DVD-ROM Drive
7.26 Installing the DVD-ROM Drive
7.27 Removing the Internal USB Flash Drive
7.28 Installing the Internal USB Flash Drive
7.29 Removing the System Battery
7.30 Installing the System Battery
7.31 Removing the RAID Controller Card from the Mainboard
7.32 Installing the RAID Controller Card on the Mainboard
7.33 Removing the Standard RAID Controller Card
7.34 Installing the Standard RAID Controller Card
7.35 Removing the Supercapacitor
7.36 Installing the Supercapacitor
7.37 Removing a CPU
7.38 Installing a CPU
7.39 Removing a DIMM
7.40 Installing a DIMM
7.41 Removing the Mainboard
7.42 Installing the Mainboard
7.43 Removing the NIC

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 120


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 7 Replacing Parts

7.44 Installing a NIC


7.45 Removing the LCD
7.46 Installing the LCD
7.47 Removing a SATADOM
7.48 Installing a SATADOM
7.49 Removing an SD Card
7.50 Installing an SD Card
7.51 Removing the Front Hard Disk Backplane
7.52 Installing the Front Hard Disk Backplane
7.53 Removing the Rear Hard Disk Backplane
7.54 Installing the Rear Hard Disk Backplane
7.55 Removing the VGA Board
7.56 Installing the VGA Board
7.57 Removing the PSU Backplane
7.58 Installing the PSU Backplane
7.59 Removing the Left Mounting Ear
7.60 Installing the Left Mounting Ear
7.61 Removing the Right Mounting Ear
7.62 Installing the Right Mounting Ear
7.63 Removing an M.2 SATA SSD Card
7.64 Installing an M.2 SATA SSD Card

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 121


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 7 Replacing Parts

7.1 Replaceable Parts


The RH2288H V3 is 2 U high and has the following replaceable parts:
l (Optional) Front bezel
l Mainboard
l Hard disk
l NVMe PCIe SSD
l Power supply unit (PSU)
l DVD drive (optional)
l Fan module
l CPU
l Peripheral Component Interconnect Express (PCIe) card
l Riser card
l RAID controller card
l Supercapacitor
l System battery
l Trusted platform module (TPM) (optional)
l USB device
l Dual in-line memory module (DIMM)
l Hard disk backplane
l Network interface card (NIC)
l LCD
l SATADOM
l Secure digital (SD) card
l Video graphics array (VGA) board
l PSU backplane
l Mounting ear
l M.2 SATA SSD card

NOTE

The preceding parts are for reference only. Actual replaceable parts may differ.

7.2 Tool Preparations


Prepare the following tools before replacing components:
l Finger cots
l Protective gloves
l Flat-head screwdriver
l M3 Phillips screwdriver

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 122


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 7 Replacing Parts

l 7 mm hexagonal socket screwdriver


l ESD gloves or ESD wrist strap
l Packaging materials, for example, an ESD bag

7.3 Removing the Front Bezel


Remove the front bezel before removing front panel components (such as hard disks and the
DVD drive) or left and right mounting ears.

Procedure
Step 1 Wear an ESD wrist strap. For details, see 1 Safety Instructions.

Step 2 Unlock the front bezel by turning the key clockwise, and remove the key for proper storage.
See Figure 7-1.

Figure 7-1 Unlocking the front bezel

Step 3 Press the button and remove the front bezel. See Figure 7-2.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 123


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 7 Replacing Parts

Figure 7-2 Removing the front bezel

----End

7.4 (Optional) Installing the Front Bezel


Install the front bezel after replacing front panel components (such as hard disks and the DVD
drive) or left and right mounting ears. The front bezel is optional and can be selected as
required.

Procedure
Step 1 Wear an ESD wrist strap. For details, see 1 Safety Instructions.

Step 2 Remove the key from the front bezel. See Figure 7-3.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 124


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 7 Replacing Parts

Figure 7-3 Removing a key

Step 3 Unlock the front bezel by turning the key clockwise, and remove the key for proper storage.
See Figure 7-4.

Figure 7-4 Unlocking the front bezel

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 125


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 7 Replacing Parts

Step 4 Hook the front bezel onto the side of the left mounting ear, and press the button so that the
front bezel is secured to the chassis. See Figure 7-5.

Figure 7-5 Installing the front bezel

Step 5 Lock the front bezel by turning the key counterclockwise, and remove the key for proper
storage. See Figure 7-6.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 126


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 7 Replacing Parts

Figure 7-6 Locking the front bezel

----End

7.5 Removing a Hard Disk


Remove a hard disk before replacing it with a new one.

Do not power off the RH2288H V3 before removing a hard disk. If services are running on
the RH2288H V3, you have backed up the data stored on the hard disk to be removed.

Table 7-1 shows the mapping between the silkscreens of the hard disks and Slot IDs in the
System Event Log.

Table 7-1 Mapping


Hard Disk Position Panel Silkscreen Slot ID

Front hard disks 0 to 7 (8 x 2.5-inch hard disk0 to disk7


disks)

0 to 7 (8 x 3.5-inch hard disk0 to disk7


disks)

0 to 11 disk0 to disk11

0 to 23 disk0 to disk23

0 to 24 disk0 to disk24

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 127


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 7 Replacing Parts

Hard Disk Position Panel Silkscreen Slot ID

Rear hard disks HDD A0, HDD B0, HDD diskA, diskB, diskC, diskD
A1, HDD B1

NOTE
For the mapping between hard disk silkscreens and physical slots, see 2.2 Appearance.

Procedure
Step 1 Wear an ESD wrist strap. For details, see 1 Safety Instructions.

Step 2 Determine the rack number and chassis number of the server to be removed, and label its
panel to prevent misoperations.
Step 3 If a front hard disk needs to be removed and the server is equipped with a front bezel, remove
the bezel. For details, see 7.3 Removing the Front Bezel.
Step 4 Determine the position of the hard disk (for example, a front hard disk) on the RH2288H V3.
See Figure 7-7.

Figure 7-7 Hard disk position

Step 5 Push the ejector release button on the hard disk. See step (1) in Figure 7-8.
The ejector lever automatically ejects.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 128


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 7 Replacing Parts

Figure 7-8 Removing a hard disk

Step 6 Hold the ejector lever, and pull out the hard disk for about 3 cm (1.18 in.). See step (2) in
Figure 7-8. Wait for at least 30 seconds until the hard disk stops working. Then remove the
hard disk from the RH2288H V3. See step (3) in Figure 7-8.
Step 7 Place the removed hard disk in an ESD bag.

Step 8 (Optional) If you do not install a new hard disk immediately, install a filler panel in the slot.

----End

7.6 Installing a Hard Disk


Install a hard disk to replace the original one or add a new hard disk.

You do not need to power off the RH2288H V3 before installing a hard disk.

Procedure
Step 1 Wear an ESD wrist strap. For details, see 1 Safety Instructions.

Step 2 Remove the hard disk to be replaced. For details, see 7.5 Removing a Hard Disk.

Step 3 Take the spare hard disk out of its ESD bag.

Step 4 Fully raise the ejector lever and push the hard disk into the chassis along the guide rails until
it does not move. See step (1) in Figure 7-9.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 129


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 7 Replacing Parts

Figure 7-9 Installing a hard disk

Step 5 Ensure that the ejector lever is fastened to the chassis beam, and lower the ejector lever to
completely insert the hard disk into the chassis. See step (2) in Figure 7-9.
Observe the hard disk indicators to check the hard disk operating status. For details about the
indicators, see 2.4 Indicators and Buttons.

Step 6 If a front hard disk is installed and the bezel is required, install the bezel. For details, see 7.4
(Optional) Installing the Front Bezel.

Step 7 After verifying hard disk status, configure RAID properties based on actual service
requirements. For details, see the HUAWEI V2&V3 Server RAID Controller Card User
Guide.

----End

7.7 Removing an NVMe PCIe SSD


Remove an NVMe PCIe SSD before replacing it with a new one.

Back data on the NVMe PCIe SSD to be removed. Wait until the removal of an NVMe PCIe
SSD is complete before you remove another one. The interval between removing two SSDs
must be greater than 30 seconds.

For OSs compatible with NVMe PCIe SSDs, see the Huawei ES3000 V3 NVMe SSD
Compatibility List.

Removing an NVMe PCIe SSD on VMware


Step 1 Wear an ESD wrist strap. For details, see 1 Safety Instructions.

Step 2 Determine the rack number and chassis number of the server to be removed, and label its
panel to prevent misoperations.

Step 3 Power off the RH2288H V3. For details, see 4.2 Powering Off the Server.

Step 4 Remove the NVMe PCIe SSD. For details, see 7.5 Removing a Hard Disk.

----End

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 130


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 7 Replacing Parts

Removing an NVMe PCIe SSD on Windows


Step 1 Check the Huawei ES3000 V3 NVMe SSD Compatibility List to determine whether the OS
supports the hot swap of NVMe PCIe SSDs.
l If yes, go to Step 2.
l If no, see Removing an NVMe PCIe SSD on VMware.
Step 2 Determine the position of the NVMe PCIe SSD on the RH2288H V3. See the red box in
Figure 7-10, Figure 7-11.

Figure 7-10 NVMe PCIe SSD position (for a server with four NVMe PCIe SSDs)

Figure 7-11 NVMe PCIe SSD position (for a server with 12 NVMe PCIe SSDs)

0 3 6 9
1
2
3
4

1 4 7 10
2 5 8 11

Step 3 Stop all services on the NVMe PCIe SSD.

Step 4 Query the mapping between slot IDs and drive letters of NVMe PCIe SSDs. (In this step,
Windows Server 2012 R2 is used as an example.)
1. Choose Server Manager > Computer Management > Disk Management.
2. Right-click a hard disk and choose Properties from the shortcut menu. In the displayed
dialog box, view the value of Location for the hard disk.
3. Determine whether the hard disk is an NVMe PCIe SSD according to the value of
Location. For an NVMe PCIe SSD, record its drive letter. See Figure 7-12.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 131


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 7 Replacing Parts

Figure 7-12 Mapping between the slot ID and drive letter of an NVMe PCIe SSD

Step 5 Open the NVMe PCIe SSD ejection tool EjectTool, and view the NVMe PCIe SSDs that are
running on the server. See Figure 7-13.

Figure 7-13 Viewing running NVMe PCIe SSDs

NOTE
The device IDs of Intel NVMe PCIe SSDs are 0953.

Step 6 Select the NVMe PCIe SSD to be ejected, and click EJECT.
l After the NVMe PCIe SSD is ejected, the "Success" message is displayed, as shown in
Figure 7-14. Click OK.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 132


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 7 Replacing Parts

Figure 7-14 Selecting the NVMe PCIe SSD to be ejected

l Do not eject a running NVMe PCIe SSD. If you attempt to eject a running NVMe PCIe
SSD, EjectTool prompts you to stop services on it first, as shown in Figure 7-15.

Figure 7-15 Prompting you to stop services on an NVMe PCIe SSD

Step 7 After the NVMe PCIe SSD is ejected, its green indicator is off and its yellow indicator is
blinking at 0.5 Hz. At this moment, you can gently remove the NVMe PCIe SSD.
Remove the NVMe PCIe SSD. For details, see 7.5 Removing a Hard Disk.

----End

Removing an NVMe PCIe SSD on Linux


Step 1 Check the Huawei ES3000 V3 NVMe SSD Compatibility List to determine whether the OS
supports the hot swap of NVMe PCIe SSDs.
l If yes, go to Step 2.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 133


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 7 Replacing Parts

l If no, see Removing an NVMe PCIe SSD on VMware.


Step 2 Determine the position of the NVMe PCIe SSD on the RH2288H V3. See the red box in
Figure 7-10, Figure 7-11.
Step 3 Log in to the OS, and add pciehp.pciehp_force=1 pci=pcie_bus_perf to /boot/grub2/
grub.cfg (if the OS is installed in common mode) or /boot/efi/EFI/redhat/grub.cfg (if the
OS is installed in UEFI mode). Between the added content and its preceding content, a space
is required and no line feed is allowed, as shown in Figure 7-16.

NOTICE
l The method for configuring kernel parameters varies with the Linux OS type. For details,
see section 4.2 Orderly Hot Plug in HUAWEI ES3000 V3 NVMe PCIe SSD User
Guide.
l After the content is added, restart the server for the content to take effect.

Figure 7-16 Setting a kernel parameter

Step 4 Stop all programs that are accessing the NVMe PCIe SSD.

Step 5 If a file system is mounted to the NVMe PCIe SSD, unmount the file system from it.

Step 6 Query the mapping between server slot numbers and slot IDs in the OS. For details, see Table
7-2.
To query the mapping between slot IDs and drive letters of NVMe PCIe SSDs, see 9.6
Querying the Mapping Between NVMe PCIe SSD Drive Letters, Slot IDs, and Bus IDs
in Linux.

Table 7-2 Mapping between server slot numbers and slot IDs
Configuration Slot Number Slot ID

Four NVMe PCIe SSDs 8 to 11 8 to 11

12 NVMe PCIe SSDs 0 0-3

1 to 11 1 to 11

Step 7 Run the following command to remove the NVMe PCIe SSD:

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 134


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 7 Replacing Parts

echo n > /sys/bus/pci/slots/Slot ID/power

In the command, the value of n can be 0 or 1. The value 0 indicates that a hard disk is
unmounted, and the value 1 indicates that a hard disk is mounted. The value 1 can be used
only if a command is executed to unmount a hard disk but the hard disk is not removed.

For example, to hot-remove the NVMe PCIe SSD in slot 8, run the following command: echo
0 > /sys/bus/pci/slots/8/power

Step 8 Observe the NVMe PCIe SSD indicator. If the green indicator is off and the yellow indicator
is blinking at 0.5 Hz, the SSD is removable.
Remove the NVMe PCIe SSD. For details, see 7.5 Removing a Hard Disk.

----End

7.8 Installing an NVMe PCIe SSD


Install an NVMe PCIe SSD to replace the original one or add a new one.

Wait until the hot insertion of an NVMe PCIe SSD is complete before you install another one.
The interval between inserting two SSDs must be greater than 30 seconds.

For OSs compatible with NVMe PCIe SSDs, see the Huawei ES3000 V3 NVMe SSD
Compatibility List.

Procedure
Step 1 Wear an ESD wrist strap. For details, see 1 Safety Instructions.

Step 2 Remove the NVMe PCIe SSD to be replaced. For details, see 7.7 Removing an NVMe PCIe
SSD.

Step 3 Take the spare NVMe PCIe SSD out of its ESD bag.

Step 4 Determine the position for installing the NVMe PCIe SSD on the RH2288H V3. See the red
box in Figure 7-17, Figure 7-18.

Figure 7-17 NVMe PCIe SSD position (for a server with four NVMe PCIe SSDs)

Figure 7-18 NVMe PCIe SSD position (for a server with 12 NVMe PCIe SSDs)

0 3 6 9
1
2
3
4

1 4 7 10
2 5 8 11

Step 5 Install the NVMe PCIe SSD driver.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 135


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 7 Replacing Parts

l Intel NVMe PCIe SSDs


For Windows, you need to install the NVMe PCIe SSD driver of the latest version to
ensure NVMe PCIe SSD stability. For Linux, you are advised to use Linux versions
listed on the compatibility list. Certain Linux systems do not support the NVMe feature,
and you need to download the NVMe PCIe SSD driver from Intel's official website.
a. Download the NVMe PCIe SSD driver package from https://
downloadcenter.intel.com/download/23929.
NOTE

n Download the NVMe PCIe SSD driver of the latest version.


n If no matching Intel driver is available, use the existing hard disk driver of the OS.
b. For the driver installation method of Windows, see the Intel NVMe Install
Guide_330547-003.pdf obtained after decompressing the driver package.
c. For the driver installation method for Linux, see the
Intel_Linux_NVMe_Guide_330602-002.pdf obtained after decompressing the driver
package.
d. For the driver installation method for VMware, see the README.txt obtained after
decompressing the driver package.
l Huawei NVMe PCIe SSDs
For Windows, you need to install the NVMe PCIe SSD driver of the latest version to
ensure NVMe PCIe SSD stability. For Linux, you are advised to install the ES3000 V3
driver.
a. Download the NVMe PCIe SSD driver package from http://support.huawei.com/
enterprise/en/server/es3000-v3-pid-21500649/software.
b. For the installation method, see the HUAWEI ES3000 V3 NVMe PCIe SSD
V100R003 User Guide (ES3500&ES3600) 12.
NOTE

l The driver of the latest version is recommended.


l On a server with both a Huawei-developed ES3000 V3 NVMe PCIe SSD and an Intel NVMe PCIe SSD,
if the driver is installed for the Huawei-developed ES3000 V3 NVMe PCIe SSD, the server cannot
identify the drive letter of the Intel NVMe PCIe SSD.
l If the server is configured with Broadwell CPUs, Windows Server 2016 or later versions are
recommended to ensure better implementation of NVMe PCIe SSD hot swap.
l For NVMe PCIe SSD hot swap in Windows, wait for 3 seconds between SSD removal and installation.

Step 6 Install the NVMe PCIe SSD.


l Installing the NVMe PCIe SSD on VMware
a. Power off the server on which the NVMe PCIe SSD is to be installed. For details,
see 4.2 Powering Off the Server.
b. Install the NVMe PCIe SSD. For details, see 7.6 Installing a Hard Disk.
l Installing the NVMe PCIe SSD on Windows
a. Check the Huawei ES3000 V3 NVMe SSD Compatibility List to determine
whether the OS supports the hot swap of NVMe PCIe SSDs.
n If yes, go to Step 6.b.
n If no, see Installing the NVMe PCIe SSD on VMware.
b. Gently insert the NVMe PCIe SSD into the slot. For details, see 7.6 Installing a
Hard Disk.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 136


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 7 Replacing Parts

The green indicator for the NVMe PCIe SSD is off, and the yellow indicator blinks
at 2 Hz. Then both the green indicator and the yellow indicator are off for 30
seconds.
c. When the green indicator for the NVMe PCIe SSD becomes steady on, check the
status of the NVMe PCIe SSD in the OS.
d. If the NVMe PCIe SSD cannot be detected, open Device Manager and click Scan
for hardware changes.
e. Check the status of the NVMe PCIe SSD in the OS.
l Installing the NVMe PCIe SSD on Linux
a. Check the Huawei ES3000 V3 NVMe SSD Compatibility List to determine
whether the OS supports the hot swap of NVMe PCIe SSDs.
n If yes, go to Step 6.b.
n If no, see Installing the NVMe PCIe SSD on VMware.
b. Log in to the OS, and add pciehp.pciehp_force=1 pci=pcie_bus_perf to /boot/
grub2/grub.cfg (if the OS is installed in common mode) or /boot/efi/EFI/redhat/
grub.cfg (if the OS is installed in UEFI mode). Between the added content and its
preceding content, a space is required and no line feed is allowed, as shown in
Figure 7-19.

NOTICE
n The method for configuring kernel parameters varies with the Linux OS type.
For details, see section 4.2 Orderly Hot Plug in HUAWEI ES3000 V3 NVMe
PCIe SSD User Guide.
n After the content is added, restart the server for the content to take effect.

Figure 7-19 Setting a kernel parameter

c. Gently insert the NVMe PCIe SSD into the slot. For details, see 7.6 Installing a
Hard Disk.
The green indicator for the NVMe PCIe SSD is off, and the yellow indicator blinks
at 2 Hz. Then both the green indicator and the yellow indicator are off for 30
seconds.
d. When the green indicator for the NVMe PCIe SSD becomes steady on, check the
status of the NVMe PCIe SSD in the OS.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 137


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 7 Replacing Parts

NOTE

l The time required for powering on NVMe PCIe SSDs varies according to vendors due to different
development schemes.
l 30 seconds after the NVMe PCIe SSD is installed, if the green indicator is off and the yellow indicator
blinks at 0.5 Hz, remove and reinstall the NVMe PCIe SSD.

Step 7 Install the OS on the NVMe PCIe SSD.


l OS installation description
When installing Windows Server 2012 on an NVMe PCIe SSD, you need to load
the NVMe PCIe SSD driver for the system to detect NVMe PCIe SSDs before
proceeding with OS installation. When installing other compatible OSs on NVMe
PCIe SSDs, the NVMe PCIe SSD driver is installed along with the OS.
The Unified Extensible Firmware Interface (UEFI) mode is required when you
install an OS on an NVMe PCIe SSD.
NOTE
When an NVMe PCIe SSD is used as a system disk, you can select only the UEFI mode;
when SATADOM SoftRAID is used, you can select only the Legacy mode. Therefore, when
an NVMe PCIe SSD is used as a system disk, the server does not support SoftRAID.
l Set the UEFI mode.
Press Del upon server startup to access the BIOS. (The default password is
Huawei12#$.)
Open the boot configuration screen and set Boot Type to UEFI Boot Type.
Press F10 to save the setting and exit.
l Install Windows Server 2012 on the NVMe PCIe SSD.
Set the UEFI mode.
Download the NVMe PCIe SSD driver for Windows Server 2012, and generate a
DVD ISO file or floppy disk IMG file.
Install the OS. If the NVMe PCIe SSD cannot be detected when the system scans
for the target installation device, mount the NVMe PCIe SSD driver file by using
the virtual DVD or floppy disk drive (FDD) on the iBMC WebUI.
Load the NVMe PCIe SSD driver on the installation UI. After the NVMe PCIe SSD
is detected, proceed with the OS installation.

----End

7.9 Removing a PSU

7.9.1 Removing an AC PSU


Remove an AC power supply unit (PSU) before replacing it with a new one.
When two PSUs are configured, remove one PSU without powering off the RH2288H V3 if
the other PSU is operating properly and its power rating is greater than or equal to the power
rating of the RH2288H V3.
Observe the PSU indicators to check the PSU operating status. For details about the
indicators, see 2.4 Indicators and Buttons.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 138


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 7 Replacing Parts

Procedure
Step 1 Wear an ESD wrist strap. For details, see 1 Safety Instructions.

Step 2 Determine the rack number and chassis number of the server to be removed, and label its
panel to prevent misoperations.

Step 3 If only one PSU is configured, power off the RH2288H V3. For details, see 4.2 Powering Off
the Server.

Step 4 Open the cable tie for the power cable. See Figure 7-20.

Figure 7-20 Opening a cable tie

Step 5 Remove the power cable from the PSU to be replaced. See Figure 7-21.

Figure 7-21 Removing a power cable

Step 6 Press the latch on the PSU in the arrow direction, and pull the PSU out of the slot by holding
the handle. See steps (1) and (2) in Figure 7-22.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 139


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 7 Replacing Parts

Figure 7-22 Removing a PSU

Step 7 Place the removed PSU in an ESD bag.

----End

7.9.2 Removing a DC PSU


Remove a DC power supply unit (PSU) before replacing it with a new one.
Before removing one PSU when two PSUs are configured, ensure that the other PSU is
operating properly and supplies power higher than or equal to the power rating of the
RH2288H V3, and you do not need to power off the server.
Observe the PSU indicators to check the PSU operating status. For details about the
indicators, see 2.4 Indicators and Buttons.

Procedure
Step 1 Wear an ESD wrist strap. For details, see 1 Safety Instructions.

Step 2 Determine the rack number and chassis number of the server to be removed, and label its
panel to prevent misoperations.
Step 3 Hold down the latches above the power cables using a flat-head screwdriver to eject the
power cable. See Figure 7-23.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 140


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 7 Replacing Parts

Figure 7-23 Removing power cables

Step 4 Hold down the latch on the PSU, and pull out part of the PSU by holding the handle. See step
(1) in Figure 7-24.

Figure 7-24 Removing a PSU

Step 5 Remove the PSU from the slot. See step (2) in Figure 7-24.

----End

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 141


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 7 Replacing Parts

7.10 Installing a PSU

7.10.1 Installing an AC PSU

Install an AC power supply unit (PSU) to replace the original one.

An AC PSU needs to be added to improve reliability when only one AC PSU is configured
for the RH2288H V3.

Procedure
Step 1 Wear an ESD wrist strap. For details, see 1 Safety Instructions.

Step 2 Remove the PSU to be replaced. For details, see 7.9.1 Removing an AC PSU.

Step 3 Take the spare AC PSU out of its ESD bag.

Step 4 Push the spare AC PSU along the guide rails into a slot until the PSU clicks into place.

The PSU latch snaps in so that the PSU does not move. See Figure 7-25.

Figure 7-25 Installing an AC PSU

Step 5 Connect the power cable to the PSU. See Figure 7-26.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 142


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 7 Replacing Parts

Figure 7-26 Connecting a power cable to an AC PSU

Step 6 Secure the power cable using a cable tie. See Figure 7-27.

Figure 7-27 Securing a power cable

----End

7.10.2 Installing a DC PSU

Install a DC power supply unit (PSU) to replace the original one.

A DC PSU needs to be added to improve reliability when the RH2288H V3 is configured


with only one DC PSU.

Procedure
Step 1 Wear an ESD wrist strap. For details, see 1 Safety Instructions.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 143


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 7 Replacing Parts

Step 2 Remove the PSU to be replaced. For details, see 7.9.2 Removing a DC PSU.

Step 3 Take the spare DC PSU out of its ESD bag.

Step 4 Push the spare DC PSU along the guide rails into a slot (for example, slot 1) until you hear a
sound.
The PSU latch snaps in so that the PSU does not move. See Figure 7-28.

Figure 7-28 Installing a DC PSU

Step 5 Connect the power cable to the wiring terminal on the PSU until the power cables are latched.
See Figure 7-29.
l Connect the OT terminal on the negative power cable to the NEG(-) wiring terminal on
the PSU.
l Connect the OT terminal on the positive power cable to the RTN(+) wiring terminal on
the PSU.
l Connect the OT terminal on the ground cable to the ground terminal on the PSU.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 144


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 7 Replacing Parts

Figure 7-29 Connecting power cables to a DC PSU

----End

7.11 Removing the Chassis Cover


Remove the chassis cover before replacing components in the RH2288H V3 chassis.

Procedure
Step 1 Wear an ESD wrist strap. For details, see 1 Safety Instructions.

Step 2 Determine the rack number and chassis number of the server to be removed, and label its
panel to prevent misoperations.
Step 3 Power off the RH2288H V3. For details, see 4.2 Powering Off the Server.

Step 4 Remove all external cables such as power and network cables.

Step 5 Remove the RH2288H V3 and put it on an ESD desktop. For details, see 3.5 Removing the
RH2288H V3.
Step 6 Loosen the latch that secures the handle of the chassis cover using a flat-head screwdriver.
See step (1) in Figure 7-30.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 145


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 7 Replacing Parts

Figure 7-30 Removing the chassis cover

Step 7 Open the handle to push the chassis cover backwards. See step (2) in Figure 7-30.

Step 8 Lift the chassis cover. See step (3) in Figure 7-30.

----End

7.12 Installing the Chassis Cover


Install the chassis cover after components in the RH2288H V3 chassis are replaced.

Procedure
Step 1 Wear an ESD wrist strap. For details, see 1 Safety Instructions.

Step 2 Place the chassis cover horizontally, align it with the fixing slots on both side panels of the
chassis, and close the handle. See steps (1) and (2) in Figure 7-31.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 146


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 7 Replacing Parts

Figure 7-31 Installing the chassis cover

Step 3 Tighten the latch using a flat-head screwdriver to secure the handle. See step (3) in Figure
7-31.

Step 4 Install the RH2288H V3. For details, see 3.3 Installing a Server.

Step 5 Connect all internal cables such as power and network cables. For details, see 3.4 Connecting
External Cables.

Step 6 Power on the RH2288H V3. For details, see 4.1 Powering On the Server.

----End

7.13 Removing the Air Duct


Remove the air duct before replacing it with a new one or replacing a CPU, DIMM, or
supercapacitor.

Procedure
Step 1 Wear an ESD wrist strap. For details, see 1 Safety Instructions.

Step 2 Determine the rack number and chassis number of the server to be removed, and label its
panel to prevent misoperations.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 147


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 7 Replacing Parts

Step 3 Power off the RH2288H V3. For details, see 4.2 Powering Off the Server.

Step 4 Remove all external cables such as power and network cables.

Step 5 Remove the RH2288H V3 and put it on an ESD desktop. For details, see 3.5 Removing the
RH2288H V3.

Step 6 Remove the chassis cover. For details, see 7.11 Removing the Chassis Cover.

Step 7 Remove full-height full-length riser cards if they are installed. For details, see 7.19 Removing
the Riser Card.

Step 8 Optional: (Optional) Open the two latches on the supercapacitor tray in their respective
directions, and remove the supercapacitor tray. See steps (1) and (2) in Figure 7-32.

Figure 7-32 Removing the supercapacitor tray

Step 9 Lift the air duct. See Figure 7-33.

Figure 7-33 Removing the air duct

----End

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 148


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 7 Replacing Parts

7.14 Installing the Air Duct


Install an air duct to replace the original one or after replacing a CPU, DIMM, or
supercapacitor.

Procedure
Step 1 Wear an ESD wrist strap. For details, see 1 Safety Instructions.

Step 2 Remove the air duct to be replaced. For details, see 7.13 Removing the Air Duct.

Step 3 Take the spare air duct out of its ESD bag.

Step 4 Align the positioning pin on the air duct with the fixing hole by following instructions on the
chassis and place the air duct downwards so that the pins on four corners of the air duct fits
into the dents on the chassis. See Figure 7-34.

Figure 7-34 Installing the air duct

Step 5 Optional: Install the supercapacitor tray on the air duct in the arrow direction. See Figure
7-35.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 149


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 7 Replacing Parts

Figure 7-35 Installing the supercapacitor tray

Step 6 Install full-height full-length riser cards if they are required. For details, see 7.20 Installing a
Riser Card.

Step 7 Install the chassis cover. For details, see 7.12 Installing the Chassis Cover.

Step 8 Install the RH2288H V3. For details, see 3.3 Installing a Server.

Step 9 Connect all internal cables such as power and network cables. For details, see 3.4 Connecting
External Cables.

Step 10 Power on the RH2288H V3. For details, see 4.1 Powering On the Server.

----End

7.15 Removing a Fan Module


Remove a fan module before replacing it with a new one or removing other components (such
as the mainboard and DVD drive).

Procedure
Step 1 Wear an ESD wrist strap. For details, see 1 Safety Instructions.

Step 2 Determine the rack number and chassis number of the server to be removed, and label its
panel to prevent misoperations.

Step 3 Power off the RH2288H V3. For details, see 4.2 Powering Off the Server.

Step 4 Remove all external cables such as power and network cables.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 150


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 7 Replacing Parts

Step 5 Remove the RH2288H V3 and put it on an ESD desktop. For details, see 3.5 Removing the
RH2288H V3.

Step 6 Remove the chassis cover. For details, see 7.11 Removing the Chassis Cover.

Step 7 Remove full-height full-length riser cards if they are installed. For details, see 7.19 Removing
the Riser Card.

Step 8 Open the memory windows on the air duct, See step (1) in Figure 7-36.

Figure 7-36 Removing a fan module

Step 9 Lift the fan module slowly out of the RH2288H V3. See step (2) in Figure 7-36.

Step 10 Place the removed fan module in an ESD bag.

----End

7.16 Installing a Fan Module


Install a fan module to replace the original one or after replacing other components (such as
the mainboard and DVD drive).

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 151


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 7 Replacing Parts

Procedure
Step 1 Wear an ESD wrist strap. For details, see 1 Safety Instructions.

Step 2 Remove the fan module to be replaced. For details, see 7.15 Removing a Fan Module.

Step 3 Take the spare fan module out of its ESD bag.

Step 4 Insert the fan module along the guide rails into the slot. Check that the fan cable connector is
securely inserted into the mainboard connector. See step (1) in Figure 7-37.

Figure 7-37 Installing a fan module

Step 5 Close the memory window on the air duct. See step (2) in Figure 7-37.

Step 6 Install full-height full-length riser cards if they are required. For details, see 7.20 Installing a
Riser Card.
Step 7 Install the chassis cover. For details, see 7.12 Installing the Chassis Cover.

Step 8 Install the RH2288H V3. For details, see 3.3 Installing a Server.

Step 9 Connect all internal cables such as power and network cables. For details, see 3.4 Connecting
External Cables.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 152


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 7 Replacing Parts

Step 10 Power on the RH2288H V3. For details, see 4.1 Powering On the Server.

----End

7.17 Removing an Internal Cable


Remove an internal cable before replacing it with a new one.

Procedure
Step 1 Wear an ESD wrist strap. For details, see 1 Safety Instructions.

Step 2 Determine the rack number and chassis number of the server to be removed, and label its
panel to prevent misoperations.
Step 3 Power off the RH2288H V3. For details, see 4.2 Powering Off the Server.

Step 4 Remove all external cables such as power and network cables.

Step 5 Remove the RH2288H V3 and put it on an ESD desktop. For details, see 3.5 Removing the
RH2288H V3.
Step 6 Remove the chassis cover. For details, see 7.11 Removing the Chassis Cover.

Step 7 Determine the cable to be removed. For details, see 2.7 Internal Cabling.

Step 8 Remove the air duct. For details, see 7.13 Removing the Air Duct.

Step 9 Vertically lift a fan module until it is disconnected from the mainboard. See Figure 7-38. Use
the same method to remove the other fan modules.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 153


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 7 Replacing Parts

Figure 7-38 Removing a fan module

Step 10 Press and hold down the latches on both sides of a fan module bracket, and lift the fan
support. Use the same method to lift the other fan module bracket. See Figure 7-39.

Figure 7-39 Removing a fan module bracket

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 154


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 7 Replacing Parts

Step 11 Remove the cable to be removed.

Step 12 Place the removed cable in an ESD bag.

----End

7.18 Installing an Internal Cable


Install an internal cable to replace the original one.

Procedure
Step 1 Wear an ESD wrist strap. For details, see 1 Safety Instructions.

Step 2 Remove the cable to be replaced. For details, see 7.17 Removing an Internal Cable.

Step 3 Take a spare cable out of the ESD bag.

Step 4 Install the spare cable. For details about cable port positions, see 2.7 Internal Cabling.

Step 5 Install fan module brackets in the chassis. See Figure 7-40.

Figure 7-40 Installing fan module brackets

Step 6 Insert fan modules into the slots and ensure that fan module cable connectors fit into the ports
on the mainboard. See Figure 7-41.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 155


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 7 Replacing Parts

Figure 7-41 Installing fan modules

Step 7 Install the air duct. For details, see 7.14 Installing the Air Duct.

Step 8 Install the chassis cover. For details, see 7.12 Installing the Chassis Cover.

Step 9 Install the RH2288H V3. For details, see 3.3 Installing a Server.

Step 10 Connect all internal cables such as power and network cables. For details, see 3.4 Connecting
External Cables.

Step 11 Power on the RH2288H V3. For details, see 4.1 Powering On the Server.

----End

7.19 Removing the Riser Card


Remove the riser card before replacing it with a new one, replacing the RAID controller card,
or replacing the mainboard.

Procedure
Step 1 Wear an ESD wrist strap. For details, see 1 Safety Instructions.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 156


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 7 Replacing Parts

Step 2 Determine the rack number and chassis number of the server to be removed, and label its
panel to prevent misoperations.
Step 3 Power off the RH2288H V3. For details, see 4.2 Powering Off the Server.

Step 4 Remove all external cables such as power and network cables.

Step 5 Remove the RH2288H V3 and put it on an ESD desktop. For details, see 3.5 Removing the
RH2288H V3.
Step 6 Remove the chassis cover. For details, see 7.11 Removing the Chassis Cover.

Step 7 (Optional) Remove all cables from the riser card if any.

Step 8 Lift the riser card tray. See Figure 7-42.

Figure 7-42 Removing a riser card tray

Step 9 Remove the PCIe cards from the riser card tray. For details, see 7.21.1 Removing a PCIe
Card from a Riser Card.
Step 10 Loosen the screw on the riser card. See step (1) in Figure 7-43.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 157


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 7 Replacing Parts

Figure 7-43 Removing a riser card

Step 11 Pull the riser card in the arrow direction to remove it. See step (2) in Figure 7-43.

Step 12 Place the removed riser card in the ESD bag.

----End

7.20 Installing a Riser Card


Install a riser card to replace the original one or add new PCIe cards.
You can insert only a riser card into the riser card slot on the mainboard, but cannot directly
insert a PCIe card into this slot.

Procedure
Step 1 Wear an ESD wrist strap. For details, see 1 Safety Instructions.

Step 2 Remove the riser card to be replaced. For details, see 7.19 Removing the Riser Card.

Step 3 Take the spare riser card out of its ESD bag.

Step 4 Push the riser card in the arrow direction until it does not move. See step (1) in Figure 7-44.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 158


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 7 Replacing Parts

Figure 7-44 Installing a riser module

Step 5 Tighten the screw on the riser card. See (2) in Figure 7-44.

Step 6 Install a PCIe card on the riser card. For details, see 7.22.1 Installing a PCIe Card on the
Riser Card.

Step 7 Install the riser card tray. See Figure 7-45.

Figure 7-45 Installing a riser card tray

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 159


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 7 Replacing Parts

Step 8 (Optional) Connect cables to the riser card if required.

Step 9 Install the chassis cover. For details, see 7.12 Installing the Chassis Cover.

Step 10 Install the RH2288H V3. For details, see 3.3 Installing a Server.

Step 11 Connect all internal cables such as power and network cables. For details, see 3.4 Connecting
External Cables.
Step 12 Power on the RH2288H V3. For details, see 4.1 Powering On the Server.

----End

7.21 Removing a PCIe Card


A PCIe card can be installed on the mainboard or on a riser card. The following describes
how to remove a PCIe card from the mainboard or from a riser card.

7.21.1 Removing a PCIe Card from a Riser Card


Remove a PCIe card before replacing it with a new one or removing the riser card where it is
installed.

Procedure
Step 1 Wear an ESD wrist strap. For details, see 1 Safety Instructions.

Step 2 Determine the rack number and chassis number of the server to be removed, and label its
panel to prevent misoperations.
Step 3 Power off the RH2288H V3. For details, see 4.2 Powering Off the Server.

Step 4 Remove all external cables such as power and network cables.

Step 5 Remove the RH2288H V3 and put it on an ESD desktop. For details, see 3.5 Removing the
RH2288H V3.
Step 6 Remove the chassis cover. For details, see 7.11 Removing the Chassis Cover.

Step 7 Remove all cables from the riser card if any.

Step 8 Remove a riser card tray. Lift the riser card tray. See Figure 7-46.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 160


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 7 Replacing Parts

Figure 7-46 Removing a riser card tray

Step 9 Horizontally push the PCIe card latch outwards to release it. See step (1) in Figure 7-47.

Figure 7-47 Removing a PCIe card from a riser card

Step 10 Open the PCIe card latch. See step (2) in Figure 7-47.

Step 11 Remove the PCIe card. See step (3) in Figure 7-47.

Step 12 Place the removed PCIe card in an ESD bag.

----End

7.21.2 Removing a PCIe Card from the Mainboard

Remove a non-hot-swappable PCIe card before replacing it with a new one.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 161


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 7 Replacing Parts

Procedure
Step 1 Wear an ESD wrist strap. For details, see 1 Safety Instructions.

Step 2 Determine the rack number and chassis number of the server to be removed, and label its
panel to prevent misoperations.
Step 3 Power off the RH2288H V3. For details, see 4.2 Powering Off the Server.

Step 4 Remove all external cables such as power and network cables.

Step 5 Remove the RH2288H V3 and put it on an ESD desktop. For details, see 3.5 Removing the
RH2288H V3.
Step 6 Remove the chassis cover. For details, see 7.11 Removing the Chassis Cover.

Step 7 Open the PCIe card latch. See step (1) in Figure 7-48.

Figure 7-48 Removing a PCIe card from the mainboard

Step 8 Lift the PCIe card slowly out of the slot. See step (2) in Figure 7-48.

Step 9 Place the removed PCIe card in an ESD bag.

----End

7.22 Installing a PCIe Card


This topic describes how to install a Peripheral Component Interconnect Express (PCIe) card
on the riser card and on the mainboard.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 162


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 7 Replacing Parts

7.22.1 Installing a PCIe Card on the Riser Card


Install a PCIe card to replace the original one or add a new PCIe card.

Procedure
Step 1 Wear an ESD wrist strap. For details, see 1 Safety Instructions.
Step 2 Remove from the riser card the PCIe card to be replaced. For details, see 7.21.1 Removing a
PCIe Card from a Riser Card.
Step 3 Take the spare PCIe card out of its ESD bag.
Step 4 Insert the PCIe card into a PCIe expansion slot. See step (1) in Figure 7-49.

Figure 7-49 Installing a PCIe card on the riser card

Step 5 Close the latch. See step (2) in Figure 7-49.


Step 6 Optional: Some GPUs need to connect to dedicated power cables. If the PCIe card is a GPU,
select a power cable connection method based on the GPU model.
The power cable connection methods are as follows:
l Using no power cable
l Using both a 6-pin power cable and an 8-pin power cable
Connect the 6-pin connector on the GPU to an 8-pin connector on either side of the
riser card. See step (1) in Figure 7-50.
Connect the 8-pin connector on the GPU to an 8-pin connector on either side of the
riser card. See step (2) in Figure 7-50.
l Using a 6-pin power cable
Connect the 6-pin connector on the GPU to an 8-pin connector on either side of the riser
card. See step (3) in Figure 7-50.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 163


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 7 Replacing Parts

l Using an 8-pin power cable


Connect the 8-pin connector on the GPU to an 8-pin connector on either side of the riser
card. See step (4) in Figure 7-50.
l Using an 8-pin (one-to-two) power cable
Connect the 8-pin connector on the GPU to the 8-pin connectors on both sides of the
riser card. See step (5) in Figure 7-50.

Figure 7-50 Connecting power cables to a GPU

Step 7 Install the riser card tray. See Figure 7-51.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 164


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 7 Replacing Parts

Figure 7-51 Installing a riser card tray

Step 8 Connect cables to the riser card.

Step 9 Install the chassis cover. For details, see 7.12 Installing the Chassis Cover.

Step 10 Install the RH2288H V3. For details, see 3.3 Installing a Server.

Step 11 Connect all internal cables such as power and network cables. For details, see 3.4 Connecting
External Cables.
Step 12 Power on the RH2288H V3. For details, see 4.1 Powering On the Server.

----End

7.22.2 Installing a PCIe Card on the Mainboard


Install a non-hot-swappable PCIe card to replace the original one.

Procedure
Step 1 Wear an ESD wrist strap. For details, see 1 Safety Instructions.

Step 2 Remove from the mainboard the PCIe card to be replaced. For details, see 7.21.2 Removing a
PCIe Card from the Mainboard.
Step 3 Take the spare PCIe card out of its ESD bag.

Step 4 Insert the PCIe card into a PCIe slot. See step (1) in Figure 7-52.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 165


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 7 Replacing Parts

Figure 7-52 Installing a PCIe card on the mainboard

Step 5 Close the latch. See step (2) in Figure 7-52.

Step 6 Install the chassis cover. For details, see 7.12 Installing the Chassis Cover.

Step 7 Install the RH2288H V3. For details, see 3.3 Installing a Server.

Step 8 Connect all internal cables such as power and network cables. For details, see 3.4 Connecting
External Cables.
Step 9 Power on the RH2288H V3. For details, see 4.1 Powering On the Server.

----End

7.23 Removing the TPM


Remove a trusted platform module (TPM) before replacing it with a new one.

Procedure
Step 1 Wear an ESD wrist strap. For details, see 1 Safety Instructions.

Step 2 Determine the rack number and chassis number of the server to be removed, and label its
panel to prevent misoperations.
Step 3 Power off the RH2288H V3. For details, see 4.2 Powering Off the Server.

Step 4 Remove all external cables such as power and network cables.

Step 5 Remove the RH2288H V3 and put it on an ESD desktop. For details, see 3.5 Removing the
RH2288H V3.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 166


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 7 Replacing Parts

Step 6 Remove the chassis cover. For details, see 7.11 Removing the Chassis Cover.

Step 7 Remove the riser card above the TPM. For details, see 7.19 Removing the Riser Card.

Step 8 Determine the TPM position. See Figure 7-53.

Figure 7-53 Determining the TPM position

Step 9 Loosen the screw on the TPM using a Phillips screwdriver. See step (1) in Figure 7-54.

Figure 7-54 Removing the TPM

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 167


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 7 Replacing Parts

Step 10 Remove the TPM from the mainboard. See step (2) in Figure 7-54.

Step 11 Place the removed TPM in an ESD bag.

----End

7.24 Installing the TPM


Install a trusted platform module (TPM) to replace the original one.

Procedure
Step 1 Wear an ESD wrist strap. For details, see 1 Safety Instructions.

Step 2 Remove the TPM to be replaced. For details, see 7.23 Removing the TPM.

Step 3 Take the spare TPM out of its ESD bag.

Step 4 Insert the TPM vertically downwards into the connector on the mainboard. See step (1) in
Figure 7-55.

Figure 7-55 Installing the TPM

Step 5 Tighten the screw on the TPM using a Phillips screwdriver. See step (2) in Figure 7-55.

Step 6 Install the riser card above the TPM. For details, see 7.20 Installing a Riser Card.

Step 7 Install the chassis cover. For details, see 7.12 Installing the Chassis Cover.

Step 8 Install the RH2288H V3. For details, see 3.3 Installing a Server.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 168


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 7 Replacing Parts

Step 9 Connect all internal cables such as power and network cables. For details, see 3.4 Connecting
External Cables.
Step 10 Power on the RH2288H V3. For details, see 4.1 Powering On the Server.
----End

7.25 Removing the DVD-ROM Drive


Remove the DVD-ROM drive before replacing it with a new one.

With Eight 2.5-inch Hard Disks


Step 1 Wear an ESD wrist strap. For details, see 1 Safety Instructions.
Step 2 Determine the rack number and chassis number of the server to be removed, and label its
panel to prevent misoperations.
Step 3 Power off the RH2288H V3. For details, see 4.2 Powering Off the Server.
Step 4 Remove all external cables such as power and network cables.
Step 5 Remove the RH2288H V3 and put it on an ESD desktop. For details, see 3.5 Removing the
RH2288H V3.
Step 6 Remove the chassis cover. For details, see 7.11 Removing the Chassis Cover.
Step 7 Remove the air duct. For details, see 7.13 Removing the Air Duct.
Step 8 Remove all fan modules. For details, see 7.15 Removing a Fan Module.
Step 9 Press and hold down the latches on both sides of a fan module bracket, and lift the bracket.
Use the same method to lift the other fan module bracket. See steps (1) and (2) in Figure
7-56.

Figure 7-56 Removing fan module brackets

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 169


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 7 Replacing Parts

Step 10 Remove all cables from the DVD-ROM drive. See step (1) in Figure 7-57.

Figure 7-57 Removing the DVD-ROM drive from a server with eight 2.5-inch hard disks

1
3

Step 11 Hold down the plastic latch on the DVD-ROM drive, and push the DVD-ROM drive
outwards to remove it from the chassis. See steps (2) and (3) in Figure 7-57.
Step 12 Place the removed DVD-ROM drive in an ESD bag.

----End

With Eight 3.5-inch Hard Disks


Step 1 Wear an ESD wrist strap. For details, see 1 Safety Instructions.
Step 2 Determine the rack number and chassis number of the server to be removed, and label its
panel to prevent misoperations.
Step 3 Power off the RH2288H V3. For details, see 4.2 Powering Off the Server.
Step 4 Remove all external cables such as power and network cables.
Step 5 Remove the RH2288H V3 and put it on an ESD desktop. For details, see 3.5 Removing the
RH2288H V3.
Step 6 Remove the chassis cover. For details, see 7.11 Removing the Chassis Cover.
Step 7 Remove full-height full-length riser cards if they are installed. For details, see 7.19 Removing
the Riser Card.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 170


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 7 Replacing Parts

Step 8 Remove the air duct. For details, see 7.13 Removing the Air Duct.

Step 9 Remove all fan modules. For details, see 7.15 Removing a Fan Module.

Step 10 Press and hold down the latches on both sides of a fan module bracket, and lift the bracket.
Use the same method to lift the other fan module bracket. See steps (1) and (2) in Figure
7-58.

Figure 7-58 Removing fan module brackets

Step 11 Locate the cables connecting the mainboard and the front hard disk backplane to the DVD-
ROM drive, and disconnect the cables from the mainboard and the front hard disk backplane.
For details, see 2.7 Internal Cabling.
Step 12 Use a Phillips screwdriver to unscrew the DVD-ROM drive panel. See step (1) in Figure
7-59.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 171


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 7 Replacing Parts

Figure 7-59 Removing the DVD-ROM drive panel

Step 13 Remove all cables from the DVD-ROM drive. See step (1) in Figure 7-60.

Figure 7-60 Removing the DVD-ROM drive from a server with eight 3.5-inch hard disks

Step 14 Hold down the plastic latch on the DVD-ROM drive, and push the DVD-ROM drive
outwards to remove it from the chassis. See steps (2) and (3) in Figure 7-60.

Step 15 Place the removed DVD-ROM drive in an ESD bag.

----End

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 172


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 7 Replacing Parts

7.26 Installing the DVD-ROM Drive


Install a DVD-ROM drive to replace the original one.

With Eight 2.5-inch Hard Disks


Step 1 Wear an ESD wrist strap. For details, see 1 Safety Instructions.
Step 2 Remove the DVD-ROM drive to be replaced. For details, see 7.25 Removing the DVD-
ROM Drive.
Step 3 Take the spare DVD-ROM drive out of its ESD bag.
Step 4 Tighten two M2 flat-head screws using the Phillips screwdriver to secure the plastic latch to
the DVD-ROM drive. See step (1) in Figure 7-61.

Figure 7-61 Installing the DVD-ROM drive on a server with eight 2.5-inch hard disks

Step 5 Insert the DVD-ROM drive into the support. See step (2) in Figure 7-61.
Step 6 Connect cables to the DVD-ROM drive. See step (3) in Figure 7-61.
NOTE
If fan modules have been installed, remove them and the fan support before connecting the cable.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 173


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 7 Replacing Parts

Step 7 Install the fan module brackets in the chassis. See Figure 7-62.

Figure 7-62 Installing fan module brackets

Step 8 Install the fan modules. For details, see 7.16 Installing a Fan Module.

Step 9 Install the air duct. For details, see 7.14 Installing the Air Duct.

Step 10 Install the chassis cover. For details, see 7.12 Installing the Chassis Cover.

Step 11 Install the RH2288H V3. For details, see 3.3 Installing a Server.

Step 12 Connect all internal cables such as power and network cables. For details, see 3.4 Connecting
External Cables.
Step 13 Power on the RH2288H V3. For details, see 4.1 Powering On the Server.

----End

With Eight 3.5-inch Hard Disks


Step 1 Wear an ESD wrist strap. For details, see 1 Safety Instructions.

Step 2 Remove the DVD-ROM drive to be replaced. For details, see 7.25 Removing the DVD-
ROM Drive.
Step 3 Take the spare DVD-ROM drive out of its ESD bag.

Step 4 Tighten two M2 flat-head screws using the Phillips screwdriver to secure the plastic latch to
the DVD-ROM drive. See step (1) in Figure 7-63.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 174


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 7 Replacing Parts

Figure 7-63 Installing the DVD-ROM drive on a server with eight 3.5-inch hard disks

Step 5 Insert the DVD-ROM drive into its tray. See step (2) in Figure 7-63.
Step 6 Connect cables to the DVD-ROM drive. See step (3) in Figure 7-63.
Step 7 Push the DVD-ROM drive tray into the chassis. See step (1) in Figure 7-64.

Figure 7-64 Installing the DVD-ROM drive tray

Step 8 Use a Phillips screwdriver to tighten the screws. See step (2) in Figure 7-64.
NOTE
If fan modules have been installed, remove them and the fan support before tightening the screws.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 175


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 7 Replacing Parts

Step 9 Connect the cables from the DVD-ROM drive to the mainboard and the front hard disk
backplane. For details, see 2.7 Internal Cabling.

Step 10 Install the fan module brackets in the chassis. See Figure 7-65.

Figure 7-65 Installing fan module brackets

Step 11 Install the fan modules. For details, see 7.16 Installing a Fan Module.

Step 12 Install the air duct. For details, see 7.14 Installing the Air Duct.

Step 13 Install the chassis cover. For details, see 7.12 Installing the Chassis Cover.

Step 14 Install the RH2288H V3. For details, see 3.3 Installing a Server.

Step 15 Connect all internal cables such as power and network cables. For details, see 3.4 Connecting
External Cables.

Step 16 Power on the RH2288H V3. For details, see 4.1 Powering On the Server.

----End

7.27 Removing the Internal USB Flash Drive


Remove the USB flash drive before replacing it with a new one.

Procedure
Step 1 Wear an ESD wrist strap. For details, see 1 Safety Instructions.

Step 2 Determine the rack number and chassis number of the server to be removed, and label its
panel to prevent misoperations.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 176


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 7 Replacing Parts

Step 3 Power off the RH2288H V3. For details, see 4.2 Powering Off the Server.

Step 4 Remove all external cables such as power and network cables.

Step 5 Remove the RH2288H V3 and put it on an ESD desktop. For details, see 3.5 Removing the
RH2288H V3.
Step 6 Remove the chassis cover. For details, see 7.11 Removing the Chassis Cover.

Step 7 Remove the internal USB flash drive from the connector on the mainboard. See Figure 7-66
and Figure 7-67.

Figure 7-66 Removing the internal USB flash drive (USB 2.0 port for the management
system)

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 177


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 7 Replacing Parts

Figure 7-67 Removing the internal USB flash drive (USB 3.0 port for the service system)

Step 8 Place the removed USB flash drive in an ESD bag.

----End

7.28 Installing the Internal USB Flash Drive


Install a USB flash drive to replace the original one.

Procedure
Step 1 Wear an ESD wrist strap. For details, see 1 Safety Instructions.

Step 2 Remove the USB flash drive to be replaced. For details, see 7.27 Removing the Internal
USB Flash Drive.
Step 3 Take the spare USB flash drive out of its ESD bag.

Step 4 Insert the USB flash drive into the upper USB port. See Figure 7-68 and Figure 7-69.
NOTE

The lower USB port is unavailable.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 178


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 7 Replacing Parts

Figure 7-68 Installing the USB flash drive (USB 2.0 port for the management system)

Figure 7-69 Installing the USB flash drive (USB 3.0 port for the service system)

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 179


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 7 Replacing Parts

Step 5 Install the chassis cover. For details, see 7.12 Installing the Chassis Cover.

Step 6 Install the RH2288H V3. For details, see 3.3 Installing a Server.

Step 7 Connect all internal cables such as power and network cables. For details, see 3.4 Connecting
External Cables.
Step 8 Power on the RH2288H V3. For details, see 4.1 Powering On the Server.

----End

7.29 Removing the System Battery


Remove the system battery before replacing it with a new one.

Procedure
Step 1 Wear an ESD wrist strap. For details, see 1 Safety Instructions.

Step 2 Determine the rack number and chassis number of the server to be removed, and label its
panel to prevent misoperations.
Step 3 Power off the RH2288H V3. For details, see 4.2 Powering Off the Server.

Step 4 Remove all external cables such as power and network cables.

Step 5 Remove the RH2288H V3 and put it on an ESD desktop. For details, see 3.5 Removing the
RH2288H V3.
Step 6 Remove the chassis cover. For details, see 7.11 Removing the Chassis Cover.

Step 7 Pull up the right end of the system battery and remove it from the slot. See Figure 7-70.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 180


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 7 Replacing Parts

Figure 7-70 Removing the system battery

Step 8 Place the removed system battery in an ESD bag.

----End

7.30 Installing the System Battery


Install a system battery to replace the original one.

Procedure
Step 1 Wear an ESD wrist strap. For details, see 1 Safety Instructions.

Step 2 Remove the system battery to be replaced. For details, see 7.29 Removing the System
Battery.
Step 3 Take the spare system battery out of its ESD bag.

Step 4 Hold the system battery with the side marked with text facing upwards, insert the left end of
the system battery into the slot, and gently press down the system battery until it is properly
installed in the slot. See Figure 7-71.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 181


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 7 Replacing Parts

Figure 7-71 Installing the system battery

Step 5 Install the chassis cover. For details, see 7.12 Installing the Chassis Cover.
Step 6 Install the RH2288H V3. For details, see 3.3 Installing a Server.
Step 7 Connect all internal cables such as power and network cables. For details, see 3.4 Connecting
External Cables.
Step 8 Power on the RH2288H V3. For details, see 4.1 Powering On the Server.

----End

7.31 Removing the RAID Controller Card from the


Mainboard
Remove a RAID controller card before replacing it with a new one. The appearance and
position of a RAID controller card may vary according to models, but the removal method is
the same.

Procedure
Step 1 Wear an ESD wrist strap. For details, see 1 Safety Instructions.
Step 2 Determine the rack number and chassis number of the server to be removed, and label its
panel to prevent misoperations.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 182


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 7 Replacing Parts

Step 3 Power off the RH2288H V3. For details, see 4.2 Powering Off the Server.

Step 4 Remove all external cables such as power and network cables.

Step 5 Remove the RH2288H V3 and put it on an ESD desktop. For details, see 3.5 Removing the
RH2288H V3.
Step 6 Remove the chassis cover. For details, see 7.11 Removing the Chassis Cover.

Step 7 Remove full-height full-length riser cards if they are installed. For details, see 7.19 Removing
the Riser Card.
Step 8 Determine the position for installing the RAID controller card. See Figure 7-72.

Figure 7-72 Position of the RAID controller card

Step 9 Hold down the latches on the cables to the RAID controller card, and remove the cables from
the RAID controller card. For details, see 2.7 Internal Cabling.
Step 10 Loosen the screws on the RAID controller card. See step (1) in Figure 7-73.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 183


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 7 Replacing Parts

Figure 7-73 Removing the RAID controller card

Step 11 Lift the RAID controller card slowly out of the server. See step (2) in Figure 7-73.

Step 12 Place the removed RAID controller card in an ESD bag.

----End

7.32 Installing the RAID Controller Card on the


Mainboard
Install a RAID controller card to replace the original one.

Procedure
Step 1 Wear an ESD wrist strap. For details, see 1 Safety Instructions.

Step 2 Remove the RAID controller card to be replaced. For details, see 7.31 Removing the RAID
Controller Card from the Mainboard.
Step 3 Remove the rubber plugs from the ports on the RAID controller card if any. See Figure 7-74.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 184


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 7 Replacing Parts

Figure 7-74 Ports with rubber plugs

Step 4 Take the spare RAID controller card out of its ESD bag.
Step 5 Align the connector on the RAID controller card with the port on the mainboard, and insert
the RAID controller card slowly into the mainboard. See step (1) in Figure 7-75.

Figure 7-75 Installing a RAID controller card

Step 6 Tighten the screws on the RAID controller card. See step (2) in Figure 7-75.
Step 7 Connect cables to the RAID controller card. For details, see 2.7 Internal Cabling.
Step 8 Install full-height full-length riser cards if they are required. For details, see 7.20 Installing a
Riser Card.
Step 9 Install the chassis cover. For details, see 7.12 Installing the Chassis Cover.
Step 10 Install the RH2288H V3. For details, see 3.3 Installing a Server.
Step 11 Connect all internal cables such as power and network cables. For details, see 3.4 Connecting
External Cables.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 185


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 7 Replacing Parts

Step 12 Power on the RH2288H V3. For details, see 4.1 Powering On the Server.

Step 13 Log in to the RAID configuration screen to check whether RAID configuration needs to be
imported or activated. For details, see the HUAWEI V2&V3 Server RAID Controller Card
User Guide.

----End

7.33 Removing the Standard RAID Controller Card


Remove the standard RAID controller card before replacing it with a new one.

Procedure
Step 1 Wear an ESD wrist strap. For details, see 1 Safety Instructions.

Step 2 Determine the rack number and chassis number of the server to be removed, and label its
panel to prevent misoperations.
Step 3 Power off the RH2288H V3. For details, see 4.2 Powering Off the Server.

Step 4 Remove all external cables such as power and network cables.

Step 5 Remove the RH2288H V3 and put it on an ESD desktop. For details, see 3.5 Removing the
RH2288H V3.
Step 6 Remove the chassis cover. For details, see 7.11 Removing the Chassis Cover.

Step 7 Remove the riser card if the RAID controller card to be removed is installed on a riser card.
For details, see 7.19 Removing the Riser Card.
Step 8 Disconnect the supercapacitor cable from the standard RAID controller card, as shown in
Figure 7-76.

Figure 7-76 Removing the supercapacitor cable

Step 9 Remove the SAS cables from the standard RAID controller card.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 186


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 7 Replacing Parts

Step 10 Remove the standard RAID controller card.


l For details about how to remove a standard RAID controller card on the mainboard, see
7.21.2 Removing a PCIe Card from the Mainboard.
l For details about how to remove a standard RAID controller card on a riser card, see
7.21.1 Removing a PCIe Card from a Riser Card.
Step 11 Place the removed standard RAID controller card in an ESD bag.

----End

7.34 Installing the Standard RAID Controller Card


Install a standard RAID controller card replace the original one.

Procedure
Step 1 Wear an ESD wrist strap. For details, see 1 Safety Instructions.

Step 2 Remove the standard RAID controller card to be replaced. For details, see 7.33 Removing the
Standard RAID Controller Card.
Step 3 Take the spare standard RAID controller card out of its ESD bag.

Step 4 Install the standard RAID controller card.


l For details about how to install the standard RAID controller card on the mainboard, see
7.22.2 Installing a PCIe Card on the Mainboard.
l For details about how to install the standard RAID controller card on the riser card, see
7.22.1 Installing a PCIe Card on the Riser Card.
Step 5 Connect the supercapacitor cable to the standard RAID controller card, as shown in Figure
7-77.

Figure 7-77 Connecting a supercapacitor cable

Step 6 Connect the SAS cables to the standard RAID controller card.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 187


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 7 Replacing Parts

Step 7 Install the chassis cover. For details, see 7.12 Installing the Chassis Cover.

Step 8 Install the RH2288H V3. For details, see 3.3 Installing a Server.

Step 9 Connect all internal cables such as power and network cables. For details, see 3.4 Connecting
External Cables.
Step 10 Power on the RH2288H V3. For details, see 4.1 Powering On the Server.

Step 11 Log in to the RAID configuration screen to check whether RAID configuration needs to be
imported or activated. For details, see the HUAWEI V2&V3 Server RAID Controller Card
User Guide.

----End

7.35 Removing the Supercapacitor


Remove the supercapacitor before replacing it with a new one.
When RAID controller cards using LSI SAS2208, LSI SAS3108, or PM8060 chips are
configured, you can configure a supercapacitor to provide power-off protection. Before
removing a supercapacitor, power off the server for electrical safety.

Procedure
Step 1 Wear an ESD wrist strap. For details, see 1 Safety Instructions.

Step 2 Determine the rack number and chassis number of the server to be removed, and label its
panel to prevent misoperations.
Step 3 Power off the RH2288H V3. For details, see 4.2 Powering Off the Server.

Step 4 Remove all external cables such as power and network cables.

Step 5 Remove the RH2288H V3 and put it on an ESD desktop. For details, see 3.5 Removing the
RH2288H V3.
Step 6 Remove the chassis cover. For details, see 7.11 Removing the Chassis Cover.

Step 7 Remove the riser card tray above the RAID controller card. For details, see 7.19 Removing
the Riser Card.
Step 8 Locate the supercapacitor, which is in one of the four positions shown in Figure 7-78.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 188


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 7 Replacing Parts

Figure 7-78 Supercapacitor positions

Step 9 Loosen the screws on the trans flash module (TFM). See step (1) in Figure 7-79.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 189


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 7 Replacing Parts

Figure 7-79 Removing the supercapacitor

Step 10 Vertically lift the trans flash module (TFM) out of the RAID controller card. See step (2) in
Figure 7-79.
Step 11 Horizontally open the plastic latches that secure the supercapacitor. See step (3) in Figure
7-79.
Step 12 Exert even force to lift the supercapacitor out of the server. See step (4) in Figure 7-79.
Step 13 Place the removed supercapacitor in an ESD bag.

----End

7.36 Installing the Supercapacitor


Install a supercapacitor to replace the original one.
When RAID controller cards using LSI SAS2208, LSI SAS3108, or PM8060 chips are
configured, you can configure a supercapacitor to provide power-off protection. Before
installing a supercapacitor, power off the server for electrical safety.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 190


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 7 Replacing Parts

Procedure
Step 1 Wear an ESD wrist strap. For details, see 1 Safety Instructions.

Step 2 Remove the supercapacitor to be replaced. For details, see 7.35 Removing the
Supercapacitor.
Step 3 Take the supercapacitor out of its ESD bag.

Step 4 Place the supercapacitor downwards and exert even force to install it in the tray. Ensure that
the supercapacitor is secured by the plastic latches. See step (1) in Figure 7-80.

Figure 7-80 Installing the supercapacitor

Step 5 Insert the trans flash module (TFM) vertically into the RAID controller card. See step (2) in
Figure 7-80.
Step 6 Tighten the screws on the TFM. See step (3) in Figure 7-80.

Step 7 Install the chassis cover. For details, see 7.12 Installing the Chassis Cover.

Step 8 Install the RH2288H V3. For details, see 3.3 Installing a Server.

Step 9 Connect all internal cables such as power and network cables. For details, see 3.4 Connecting
External Cables.
Step 10 Power on the RH2288H V3. For details, see 4.1 Powering On the Server.

----End

7.37 Removing a CPU

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 191


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 7 Replacing Parts

Remove a CPU before replacing it with a new one.


Only the personnel authorized by Huawei and Huawei technical support can remove a CPU
from a Huawei server. Do not wear ESD gloves to prevent damage to the pins on the CPU
socket.

Procedure
Step 1 Wear an ESD wrist strap. For details, see 1 Safety Instructions.

Step 2 Determine the rack number and chassis number of the server to be removed, and label its
panel to prevent misoperations.

Step 3 Power off the RH2288H V3. For details, see 4.2 Powering Off the Server.

Step 4 Remove all external cables such as power and network cables.

Step 5 Remove the RH2288H V3 and put it on an ESD desktop. For details, see 3.5 Removing the
RH2288H V3.

Step 6 Remove the chassis cover. For details, see 7.11 Removing the Chassis Cover.

Step 7 Remove full-height full-length riser cards if they are installed. For details, see 7.19 Removing
the Riser Card.

Step 8 Remove the air duct. For details, see 7.13 Removing the Air Duct.

Step 9 Determine the position of the CPU on the RH2288H V3. See Figure 7-81.

Figure 7-81 CPU position

Step 10 Use a Phillips screwdriver to loosen one pair of diagonally opposite screws on the heat sink
halfway and then loosen the other pair of screws. See step (1) in Figure 7-82.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 192


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 7 Replacing Parts

Figure 7-82 Removing the heat sink

Step 11 Lift the heat sink out of the server. See step (2) in Figure 7-82.

Step 12 Remove the CPU.

NOTICE
Do not use any tool or sharp object to lift the securing rod on the CPU socket. Otherwise, the
server may be damaged.

l Removing a V3 series CPU


a. Raise the securing rod near the or label. See step (1) in Figure
7-83.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 193


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 7 Replacing Parts

Figure 7-83 Removing a V3 series CPU

b. Raise the securing rod near the or label. See step (2) in Figure
7-83.
c. Open the lid that fixes the CPU, and remove the CPU from the socket. See steps (3)
and (4) in Figure 7-83.
d. Place the removed CPU in an ESD bag.

NOTICE
Ensure that CPU sockets are populated with CPUs or CPU protection caps during
transportation and storage.

l Removing a V4 series CPU


a. Raise the securing rod near the or label. See step (1) in Figure
7-84.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 194


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 7 Replacing Parts

Figure 7-84 Removing a V4 series CPU

b. Raise the securing rod near the or label. See step (2) in Figure
7-84.
c. Open the lid that fixes the CPU, and remove the CPU from the socket. See steps (3)
and (4) in Figure 7-84.
d. Place the removed CPU in an ESD bag.

NOTICE
Ensure that CPU sockets are populated with CPUs or CPU protection caps during
transportation and storage.

Step 13 (Optional) Install a CPU protection cap.


1. Close the CPU socket cover. See step (1) in Figure 7-85.

Figure 7-85 Installing a CPU protection cap

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 195


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 7 Replacing Parts

2. Hold the CPU protection cap horizontally, aligning its edges with those of the CPU
socket, and fit the protection cap securely onto the socket. See step (2) in Figure 7-85.
NOTE

An ill-positioned CPU protection cap may damage the pins in the corners of the CPU socket.
3. Close the securing rods. See steps (3) and (4) in Figure 7-85.
Step 14 Place the removed CPU in an ESD bag.

----End

7.38 Installing a CPU


Install a CPU to replace the original one.
Only the personnel authorized by Huawei and Huawei technical support can install a CPU on
a Huawei server. Do not wear ESD gloves to prevent damage to the pins on the CPU socket.

Procedure
Step 1 Wear an ESD wrist strap. For details, see 1 Safety Instructions.

Step 2 Remove the CPU to be replaced. For details, see 7.37 Removing a CPU.

Step 3 Take the spare CPU out of its ESD bag.

Step 4 Before installing CPUs, ensure that CPU sockets do not have bent pins and are free from
foreign objects.

NOTICE
If a CPU socket has bent pins or foreign objects, stop installing the CPU and contact Huawei
technical support.

Step 5 Before installing a CPU or heat sink, use tissue to clean up the oil, remaining thermal
compound, or foreign objects on their surfaces.
Step 6 To install a V3 series CPU, install the CPU installation tool first.
1. Wear finger cots and latch the CPU into one side of the CPU installation tool. Figure
7-86 shows the operation procedure.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 196


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 7 Replacing Parts

Figure 7-86 Latching a CPU into one side of a CPU installation tool

2. Pull out the other side of the CPU installation tool and squeeze the tool downward to
latch the CPU. See Figure 7-87.

Figure 7-87 Pulling out the other side of a CPU installation tool

3. Ensure that the CPU is properly latched into the two sides of the CPU installation tool.
See Figure 7-88.

Figure 7-88 CPU installation tool with the CPU inside

Step 7 Determine the area on the CPU for contacting the heat sink, and paste 0.4 ml of thermal
compound on the area.
NOTE
The thermal compound injector has volume marks.

You can paste thermal compound using any of the six methods shown in Figure 7-89 Dual-
line, five-point, and S-shape, and cross pasting methods are recommended.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 197


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 7 Replacing Parts

Figure 7-89 Pasting methods


Single-point Single-line Dual-line
pasting pasting pasting

Cross Five-point S-shape


pasting pasting pasting

Step 8 Use a clean card to smear the thermal compound over the entire center of the CPU.
The thermal compound layer is as thick as a common piece of paper. Figure 7-90 shows the
smeared thermal grease layer. Ensure that the thermal compound is evenly and fully painted.

Figure 7-90 Smeared thermal compound layer

Step 9 Install the CPUs.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 198


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 7 Replacing Parts

NOTICE
l To prevent damage to the CPU, CPU socket, or mainboard, ensure that the securing rod on
the CPU socket is fully open before you install the CPU in the socket.
l When you close the securing rod, do not exert excessive force or touch any components
and gild pins on the CPU.
l Do not move the CPU if it is not correctly placed to avoid any twisted pins. Lift the CPU
until it is out of the socket, and then place it in the socket properly.

l Installing a V3 series CPU


a. Squeeze two sides of the CPU installation tool and raise the tool with the CPU
inside. See Figure 7-91.

Figure 7-91 Raising a CPU installation tool with a CPU inside

b. Hold the CPU installation tool with the CPU inside horizontally, and place the tool
vertically downward into the CPU socket by avoiding touching the securing rods.
See step (1) in Figure 7-92.
Align the triangle mark on the CPU with the triangle mark on the CPU socket to
ensure that the CPU is properly installed. Figure 7-93 shows a CPU that is
incorrectly placed.

Figure 7-92 Installing a V3 series CPU

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 199


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 7 Replacing Parts

Figure 7-93 Wrong way to place a CPU

c. Close the cover that secures the CPU. See step (2) in Figure 7-92.
d. Lower the securing rod near the or label. See step (3) in Figure
7-92.
e. Lower the securing rod near the or label. See step (4) in Figure
7-92.
l Installing a V4 series CPU
a. Hold the CPU horizontally, align it with the CPU socket, and place the CPU
vertically downwards into the socket. See step (1) in Figure 7-94.
Align the triangle mark on the CPU with the triangle mark on the CPU socket to
ensure that the CPU is properly installed. Figure 7-95 shows a CPU that is
incorrectly placed.

Figure 7-94 Installing a V4 series CPU

Figure 7-95 Wrong way to place a CPU

b. Close the cover that secures the CPU. See step (2) in Figure 7-94.
c. Lower the securing rod near the or label. See step (3) in Figure
7-94.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 200


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 7 Replacing Parts

d. Lower the securing rod near the or label. See step (4) in Figure
7-94.

Step 10 Align the screws on the heat sink with the fastening studs on the CPU base, and place the heat
sink on the CPU. See step (1) in Figure 7-96.

Figure 7-96 Installing a heat sink

Step 11 Use a Phillips screwdriver to tighten one pair of diagonally opposite screws on the heat sink
halfway and then tighten the other pair of screws. See step (2) in Figure 7-96.

Step 12 Install the air duct. For details, see 7.14 Installing the Air Duct.

Step 13 Install full-height full-length riser cards if they are required. For details, see 7.20 Installing a
Riser Card.

Step 14 Install the chassis cover. For details, see 7.12 Installing the Chassis Cover.

Step 15 Install the RH2288H V3. For details, see 3.3 Installing a Server.

Step 16 Connect all internal cables such as power and network cables. For details, see 3.4 Connecting
External Cables.

Step 17 Power on the RH2288H V3. For details, see 4.1 Powering On the Server.

----End

7.39 Removing a DIMM


Remove a DIMM before replacing it with a new one.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 201


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 7 Replacing Parts

Procedure
Step 1 Wear an ESD wrist strap. For details, see 1 Safety Instructions.

Step 2 Determine the rack number and chassis number of the server to be removed, and label its
panel to prevent misoperations.
Step 3 Power off the RH2288H V3. For details, see 4.2 Powering Off the Server.

Step 4 Remove all external cables such as power and network cables.

Step 5 Remove the RH2288H V3 and put it on an ESD desktop. For details, see 3.5 Removing the
RH2288H V3.
Step 6 Remove the chassis cover. For details, see 7.11 Removing the Chassis Cover.

Step 7 Remove the supercapacitor if it is installed. For details, see 7.35 Removing the
Supercapacitor.
Step 8 Remove full-height full-length riser cards if they are installed. For details, see 7.19 Removing
the Riser Card.
Step 9 Remove the air duct. For details, see 7.13 Removing the Air Duct.

Step 10 Open the two fixing clips on the DIMM slot simultaneously. See step (1) in Figure 7-97.

Figure 7-97 Removing a DIMM

Step 11 Remove the DIMM from the slot. See step (2) in Figure 7-97.

Step 12 Place the removed DIMM in a memory riser box.

----End

7.40 Installing a DIMM


Install a DIMM to replace the original one or add a new DIMM.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 202


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 7 Replacing Parts

The rules for installing DIMMs are as follows:


l The RH2288H V3 provides 24 double data rate 4 (DDR4) DIMM slots. Each memory
riser integrates two memory channels: 0 and 1. Figure 7-98 shows the memory channels,
and Table 7-3 lists the memory channels.

Figure 7-98 Memory channels

Table 7-3 Memory channels


CPU Memory Channel

CPU 1 000(A), 010(B), 020(C), 030(D), 001(E), 011(F), 021(G), 031(H),


002(I), 012(J), 022(K), 032(L)

CPUs 1 and 2 000(A), 100(A), 010(B), 110(B), 020(C), 120(C), 030(D), 130(D),
001(E), 101(E), 011(F), 111(F), 021(G), 121(G), 031(H), 131(H),
002(I), 102(I), 012(J), 112(J), 022(K), 122(K), 032(L), 132(L)

l Table 7-4 describes DIMM configuration rules. For details about the DIMM
configuration rules, see Huawei Server Product Memory Configuration Assistant.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 203


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 7 Replacing Parts

Table 7-4 DIMM configuration rules


CPU DIMM Installation Sequence

CPUs 1 000(A), 010(B), 020(C), 030(D), 001(E), 011(F), 021(G),


031(H), 002(I), 012(J), 022(K), 032(L)

CPUs 1 and 2 000(A), 100(A), 010(B), 110(B), 020(C), 120(C), 030(D),


130(D), 001(E), 101(E), 011(F), 111(F), 021(G), 121(G),
031(H), 131(H), 002(I), 102(I), 012(J), 112(J), 022(K),
122(K), 032(L), 132(L)

Procedure
Step 1 Wear an ESD wrist strap. For details, see 1 Safety Instructions.

Step 2 Remove the DIMM to be replaced or remove the DIMM filler from the slot where a new
DIMM is to be installed. The method for removing a DIMM filler is the same as that for
removing a DIMM. For details, see 7.39 Removing a DIMM.
Step 3 Take the spare DIMM out of the memory riser box.

Step 4 Open the two fixing clips on the DIMM slot simultaneously. See Figure 7-99.

Figure 7-99 Opening the fixing clips on a DIMM slot

Step 5 Align the DIMM with the DIMM slot, and insert the DIMM into the slot. See Figure 7-100.
The two fixing clips close automatically.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 204


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 7 Replacing Parts

Figure 7-100 Installing a DIMM

Step 6 Install the air duct. For details, see 7.14 Installing the Air Duct.

Step 7 Install the supercapacitor if it is required. For details, see 7.36 Installing the Supercapacitor.

Step 8 Install full-height full-length riser cards if they are required. For details, see 7.20 Installing a
Riser Card.
Step 9 Install the chassis cover. For details, see 7.12 Installing the Chassis Cover.

Step 10 Install the RH2288H V3. For details, see 3.3 Installing a Server.

Step 11 Connect all internal cables such as power and network cables. For details, see 3.4 Connecting
External Cables.
Step 12 Power on the RH2288H V3. For details, see 4.1 Powering On the Server.

----End

7.41 Removing the Mainboard


Remove the mainboard before replacing it with a new one.

Procedure
Step 1 Record the mainboard firmware (iBMC, BIOS, and CPLD firmware) versions to check the
firmware versions of the new mainboard against them.
Step 2 Wear an ESD wrist strap. For details, see 1 Safety Instructions.

Step 3 Determine the rack number and chassis number of the server to be removed, and label its
panel to prevent misoperations.
Step 4 Power off the RH2288H V3. For details, see 4.2 Powering Off the Server.

Step 5 Remove all external cables such as power and network cables.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 205


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 7 Replacing Parts

Step 6 Remove the RH2288H V3 and put it on an ESD desktop. For details, see 3.5 Removing the
RH2288H V3.
Step 7 Remove the chassis cover. For details, see 7.11 Removing the Chassis Cover.

Step 8 Remove the supercapacitor if it is installed. For details, see 7.35 Removing the
Supercapacitor.
Step 9 Remove the riser cards. For details, see 7.19 Removing the Riser Card.

Step 10 Remove the air duct. For details, see 7.13 Removing the Air Duct.

Step 11 Remove all fan modules. For details, see 7.15 Removing a Fan Module.

Step 12 Press and hold down the latches on both sides of a fan module bracket, and lift the bracket.
Use the same method to lift the other fan module bracket. See steps (1) and (2) in Figure
7-101.

Figure 7-101 Removing a fan module bracket

Step 13 Remove all cables from the mainboard. For details, see 2.7 Internal Cabling.

NOTICE
Remove the FFC cable to avoid cable damage caused by the removal of the mainboard frame.
See Figure 7-102. If the FFC cable is damaged, the server cannot work.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 206


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 7 Replacing Parts

Figure 7-102 Removing an FFC cable

Step 14 Remove all DIMMs. For details, see 7.39 Removing a DIMM.

Step 15 Remove all CPUs from the mainboard. For details, see 7.37 Removing a CPU.

Step 16 Remove the RAID controller card. For details, see 7.31 Removing the RAID Controller
Card from the Mainboard.
Step 17 Remove the NIC. For details, see 7.43 Removing the NIC.

Step 18 Remove all PSUs. For details, see 7.9 Removing a PSU.

Step 19 Lift the PSU backplane. See Figure 7-103.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 207


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 7 Replacing Parts

Figure 7-103 Removing a PSU backplane

Step 20 Open the latch in arrow direction (1), and remove the cable guide in arrow direction (2). See
Figure 7-104.

Figure 7-104 Removing a cable guide

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 208


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 7 Replacing Parts

Step 21 Loosen the screw on the mainboard using a Phillips screwdriver. See step (1) in Figure 7-105.

Figure 7-105 Removing a mainboard

Step 22 Push the mainboard in the arrow direction until it does not move, and lift the mainboard out of
the RH2288H V3 by holding the handle. See step (2) in Figure 7-105.

NOTICE
Do not hold any other protruding part of the mainboard to lift it. Otherwise, the components
on the mainboard may be damaged.

Step 23 Place the removed mainboard in an ESD bag.

NOTICE
Before putting the mainboard into an ESD bag, ensure that a CPU protection cap has been
installed on a vacant CPU socket. For details about how to install a CPU protection cap, see
7.37 Removing a CPU.

----End

7.42 Installing the Mainboard


Install the mainboard to replace the original one.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 209


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 7 Replacing Parts

Procedure
Step 1 Wear an ESD wrist strap. For details, see 1 Safety Instructions.

Step 2 Remove the mainboard to be replaced. For details, see 7.41 Removing the Mainboard.

Step 3 Take the spare mainboard out of its ESD bag.

Step 4 Before installing the mainboard, ensure that CPU sockets do not have bent pins and are free
from foreign objects.

NOTICE
If CPU sockets have bent pins or foreign objects, stop installing the mainboard and contact
Huawei technical support.

Step 5 Place the mainboard into the RH2288H V3, and push the mainboard in the arrow direction by
holding the handle as far as it will go. See step (1) in Figure 7-106.

Figure 7-106 Installing the mainboard

Step 6 Tighten the screw on the mainboard using the Phillips screwdriver. See step (2) in Figure
7-106.
Step 7 Place the cable guide in the chassis, and push the cable guide in the arrow direction until it
does not move. See Figure 7-107.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 210


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 7 Replacing Parts

Figure 7-107 Installing a cable guide

Step 8 Insert the PSU backplane into the slot in the mainboard. See step (1) in Figure 7-108.

Figure 7-108 Installing the PSU backplane

Step 9 Install PSUs. For details, see 7.10 Installing a PSU.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 211


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 7 Replacing Parts

Step 10 Installing the NIC. For details, see 7.44 Installing a NIC.

Step 11 Install the RAID controller card. For details, see 7.32 Installing the RAID Controller Card
on the Mainboard.

Step 12 Install the CPUs. For details, see 7.38 Installing a CPU.

Step 13 Install the DIMMs. For details, see 7.40 Installing a DIMM.

Step 14 Connect all cables. For details, see 2.7 Internal Cabling.

Step 15 Install the fan module brackets in the chassis. See Figure 7-109.

Figure 7-109 Installing fan module brackets

Step 16 Install the fan modules. For details, see 7.16 Installing a Fan Module.

Step 17 Install the air duct. For details, see 7.14 Installing the Air Duct.

Step 18 Install the riser cards. For details, see 7.20 Installing a Riser Card.

Step 19 Install the supercapacitor if it is required. For details, see 7.36 Installing the Supercapacitor.

Step 20 Install the chassis cover. For details, see 7.12 Installing the Chassis Cover.

Step 21 Install the RH2288H V3. For details, see 3.3 Installing a Server.

Step 22 Connect all internal cables such as power and network cables. For details, see 3.4 Connecting
External Cables.

Step 23 Power on the RH2288H V3. For details, see 4.1 Powering On the Server.
NOTE
To burn the original equipment serial number (ESN) into the new mainboard after replacement, contact
Huawei engineers.

----End

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 212


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 7 Replacing Parts

7.43 Removing the NIC


Remove the NIC before replacing it with a new one.

Procedure
Step 1 Wear an ESD wrist strap. For details, see 1 Safety Instructions.
Step 2 Determine the rack number and chassis number of the server to be removed, and label its
panel to prevent misoperations.
Step 3 Power off the RH2288H V3. For details, see 4.2 Powering Off the Server.
Step 4 Remove all external cables such as power and network cables.
Step 5 Remove the RH2288H V3 and put it on an ESD desktop. For details, see 3.5 Removing the
RH2288H V3.
Step 6 Remove the chassis cover. For details, see 7.11 Removing the Chassis Cover.
Step 7 Remove the I/O module above the NIC. For details, see 7.21 Removing a PCIe Card.
Step 8 Remove the cables from the NIC.
Step 9 Loosen the screws on the NIC using a Phillips screwdriver. See step (1) in Figure 7-110.

Figure 7-110 Removing the NIC

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 213


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 7 Replacing Parts

Step 10 Pull out part of the NIC to have the NIC disconnected from the port on the mainboard.
Remove the NIC out of the server. See step (2) in Figure 7-110.
Step 11 Place the removed NIC in an ESD bag.

----End

7.44 Installing a NIC


Install a NIC to replace the original one.

Procedure
Step 1 Wear an ESD wrist strap. For details, see 1 Safety Instructions.

Step 2 Remove the NIC to be replaced. For details, see 7.43 Removing the NIC.

Step 3 Take the spare NIC out of its ESD bag.

Step 4 Use a Phillips screwdriver to loosen the screws that secure the NIC to be replaced and the
baffle plate. Remove the baffle plate and install it to the spare NIC.
Step 5 Thread the guide pins on the mainboard through the holes in the NIC, and push the NIC
horizontally into the chassis to have the NIC connected to the connector on the mainboard.
See step (1) in Figure 7-111.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 214


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 7 Replacing Parts

Figure 7-111 Installing a NIC

Step 6 Tighten the two screws using the Phillips screwdriver to secure the NIC. See step (2) in
Figure 7-111.

Step 7 Connect the cables to the NIC.

Step 8 Install the I/O module. For details, see 7.22 Installing a PCIe Card.

Step 9 Install the chassis cover. For details, see 7.12 Installing the Chassis Cover.

Step 10 Install the RH2288H V3. For details, see 3.3 Installing a Server.

Step 11 Connect all internal cables such as power and network cables. For details, see 3.4 Connecting
External Cables.

Step 12 Power on the RH2288H V3. For details, see 4.1 Powering On the Server.

----End

7.45 Removing the LCD


Remove the LCD before replacing it with a new one.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 215


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 7 Replacing Parts

With Eight 3.5-inch Hard Disks


Step 1 Wear an ESD wrist strap. For details, see 1 Safety Instructions.

Step 2 Determine the rack number and chassis number of the server to be removed, and label its
panel to prevent misoperations.
Step 3 Power off the RH2288H V3. For details, see 4.2 Powering Off the Server.

Step 4 Remove all external cables such as power and network cables.

Step 5 Remove the RH2288H V3 and put it on an ESD desktop. For details, see 3.5 Removing the
RH2288H V3.
Step 6 Remove the chassis cover. For details, see 7.11 Removing the Chassis Cover.

Step 7 Remove full-height full-length riser cards if they are installed. For details, see 7.19 Removing
the Riser Card.
Step 8 Remove the air duct. For details, see 7.13 Removing the Air Duct.

Step 9 Remove the fan modules. For details, see 7.15 Removing a Fan Module.

Step 10 Press and hold down the latches on both sides of a fan support, and lift the fan support. Use
the same method to lift the other fan support. See steps (1) and (2) in Figure 7-112.

Figure 7-112 Removing a fan support

Step 11 Remove the cable between the LCD and the video graphics array (VGA) port. See step (1) in
Figure 7-113.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 216


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 7 Replacing Parts

Figure 7-113 Removing the LCD support

Step 12 Unscrew the LCD using a Phillips screwdriver. See step (2) in Figure 7-113.

Step 13 Push the LCD support out of the chassis in the arrow direction. See step (3) in Figure 7-113.

Step 14 Unscrew the LCD. See step (1) in Figure 7-114.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 217


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 7 Replacing Parts

Figure 7-114 Removing the LCD

Step 15 Push the LCD out of the LCD support in the arrow direction to remove it. See step (2) in
Figure 7-114.
Step 16 Push the LCD out of the LCD support in the arrow direction to remove it. See step (2) in
Figure 7-114.

----End

With Eight 2.5-inch Hard Disks


Step 1 Wear an ESD wrist strap. For details, see 1 Safety Instructions.

Step 2 Determine the rack number and chassis number of the server to be removed, and label its
panel to prevent misoperations.
Step 3 Power off the RH2288H V3. For details, see 4.2 Powering Off the Server.

Step 4 Remove all external cables such as power and network cables.

Step 5 Remove the RH2288H V3 and put it on an ESD desktop. For details, see 3.5 Removing the
RH2288H V3.
Step 6 Remove the chassis cover. For details, see 7.11 Removing the Chassis Cover.

Step 7 Remove full-height full-length riser cards if they are installed. For details, see 7.19 Removing
the Riser Card.
Step 8 Remove the air duct. For details, see 7.13 Removing the Air Duct.

Step 9 Remove the fan modules. For details, see 7.15 Removing a Fan Module.

Step 10 Press and hold down the latches on both sides of a fan support, and lift the fan support. See
steps (1) and (2) in Figure 7-115.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 218


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 7 Replacing Parts

Figure 7-115 Removing a fan support

Step 11 Remove the cable between the LCD and the VGA port. See step (1) in Figure 7-113.

Step 12 Lift the bolt that secures the LCD support. See step (1) in Figure 7-116.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 219


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 7 Replacing Parts

Figure 7-116 Removing the LCD support

Step 13 Push the LCD support out of the chassis in the arrow direction. See step (2) in Figure 7-116.

Step 14 Lift the bolt that secures the LCD tray. See step (1) in Figure 7-117.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 220


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 7 Replacing Parts

Figure 7-117 Removing the LCD tray

Step 15 Push the LCD tray out of the LCD support in the arrow direction to remove it. See step (2) in
Figure 7-117.
Step 16 Unscrew the LCD tray. See step (1) in Figure 7-118.

Figure 7-118 Opening the LCD tray cover

Step 17 Open the LCD tray cover in the arrow direction. See step (2) in Figure 7-118.

Step 18 Hold down the latch in the arrow direction. See step (1) in Figure 7-119.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 221


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 7 Replacing Parts

Figure 7-119 Pulling out the LCD

Step 19 Pull the LCD out of the LCD tray in the arrow direction. See step (2) in Figure 7-119.

Step 20 Remove the LCD in the arrow direction and pull out the cable. See Figure 7-120.

Figure 7-120 Removing the LCD

Step 21 Place the removed LCD in an ESD bag.

----End

7.46 Installing the LCD


Install an LCD to replace the original one.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 222


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 7 Replacing Parts

With Eight 3.5-inch Hard Disks


Step 1 Wear an ESD wrist strap. For details, see 1 Safety Instructions.

Step 2 Remove the LCD to be replaced. For details, see 7.45 Removing the LCD.

Step 3 Take the spare LCD out of its ESD bag.

Step 4 Push the LCD into the LCD tray in the arrow direction, and tighten the screw on the LCD.
See Figure 7-121.

Figure 7-121 Installing the LCD

Step 5 Push the LCD tray into the chassis in the arrow direction. See step (1) in Figure 7-122.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 223


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 7 Replacing Parts

Figure 7-122 Installing the LCD tray

Step 6 Tighten the screws on the LCD using a Phillips screwdriver. See step (2) in Figure 7-122.

Step 7 Connect the cable between the LCD and the video graphics array (VGA) port. See step (3) in
Figure 7-122.

Step 8 Install the fan support.

Step 9 Install the fan modules. For details, see 7.16 Installing a Fan Module.

Step 10 Install the air duct. For details, see 7.14 Installing the Air Duct.

Step 11 Install full-height full-length riser cards if they are required. For details, see 7.20 Installing a
Riser Card.

Step 12 Install the chassis cover. For details, see 7.12 Installing the Chassis Cover.

Step 13 Install the RH2288H V3. For details, see 3.3 Installing a Server.

Step 14 Connect all internal cables such as power and network cables. For details, see 3.4 Connecting
External Cables.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 224


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 7 Replacing Parts

Step 15 Power on the RH2288H V3. For details, see 4.1 Powering On the Server.

----End

With Eight 2.5-inch Hard Disks


Step 1 Wear an ESD wrist strap. For details, see 1 Safety Instructions.

Step 2 Remove the LCD to be replaced. For details, see 7.45 Removing the LCD.

Step 3 Take the spare LCD out of the ESD bag.

Step 4 Lead the LCD cable through the LCD tray and align the LCD with the slot. See Figure 7-123.

Figure 7-123 Installing the LCD

Step 5 Push the LCD into the LCD tray in the arrow direction. See Figure 7-124.

Figure 7-124 Pushing the LCD into the LCD tray

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 225


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 7 Replacing Parts

Step 6 Close the LCD tray cover in the arrow direction. See step (1) in Figure 7-125.

Figure 7-125 Closing the LCD tray cover

Step 7 Tighten the screws. See step (2) in Figure 7-125.


Step 8 Lead the LCD tray cable through the LCD support.
Step 9 Push the LCD tray into the LCD support in the arrow direction. See Figure 7-126.

Figure 7-126 Installing the LCD tray

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 226


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 7 Replacing Parts

Step 10 Push the LCD support into the chassis in the arrow direction. See Figure 7-127.

Figure 7-127 Installing an LCD support

Step 11 Connect the cable between the LCD and the VGA port. See step (3) in Figure 7-122.

Step 12 Install the fan support.

Step 13 Install the fan modules. For details, see 7.16 Installing a Fan Module.

Step 14 Install the air duct. For details, see 7.14 Installing the Air Duct.

Step 15 Install full-height full-length riser cards if they are required. For details, see 7.20 Installing a
Riser Card.

Step 16 Install the chassis cover. For details, see 7.12 Installing the Chassis Cover.

Step 17 Install the RH2288H V3. For details, see 3.3 Installing a Server.

Step 18 Connect all internal cables such as power and network cables. For details, see 3.4 Connecting
External Cables.

Step 19 Power on the RH2288H V3. For details, see 4.1 Powering On the Server.

----End

7.47 Removing a SATADOM


Remove a SATADOM before replacing it with a new one.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 227


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 7 Replacing Parts

Procedure
Step 1 Wear an ESD wrist strap. For details, see 1 Safety Instructions.

Step 2 Determine the rack number and chassis number of the server to be removed, and label its
panel to prevent misoperations.
Step 3 Power off the RH2288H V3. For details, see 4.2 Powering Off the Server.

Step 4 Remove all external cables such as power and network cables.

Step 5 Remove the RH2288H V3 and put it on an ESD desktop. For details, see 3.5 Removing the
RH2288H V3.
Step 6 Remove the chassis cover. For details, see 7.11 Removing the Chassis Cover.

Step 7 Determine the position of the SATADOM on the RH2288H V3. See Figure 7-128.

Figure 7-128 SATADOM position

Step 8 Press the button on the side of the SATADOM. See step (1) in Figure 7-129.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 228


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 7 Replacing Parts

Figure 7-129 Removing a SATADOM

Step 9 Remove the SATADOM from the mainboard. See step (2) in Figure 7-129.

Step 10 Place the removed SATADOM in an ESD bag.

----End

7.48 Installing a SATADOM


Install a SATADOM to replace the original one.

Procedure
Step 1 Wear an ESD wrist strap. For details, see 1 Safety Instructions.

Step 2 Remove the SATADOM to be replaced. For details, see 7.47 Removing a SATADOM.

Step 3 Take the spare SATADOM out of its ESD bag.

Step 4 Insert the SATADOM vertically into the connector on the mainboard. See Figure 7-130.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 229


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 7 Replacing Parts

Figure 7-130 Installing a SATADOM

Step 5 Install the chassis cover. For details, see 7.12 Installing the Chassis Cover.

Step 6 Install the RH2288H V3. For details, see 3.3 Installing a Server.

Step 7 Connect all internal cables such as power and network cables. For details, see 3.4 Connecting
External Cables.
Step 8 Power on the RH2288H V3. For details, see 4.1 Powering On the Server.

----End

Verification
1. Start the server. When the BIOS startup screen is displayed, press Delete to start the
BIOS Setup Utility.
2. Enter a BIOS password when prompted.
3. Choose Advanced > PCH SATA Configuration and press Enter.
Check the component information to verify whether the replacement is successful.
SATADOM 1 and SATADOM 2 correspond to Serial ATA Port 4 and Serial ATA Port
5 respectively.

7.49 Removing an SD Card


Remove a Secure Digital (SD) card before replacing it with a new one.

Procedure
Step 1 Wear an ESD wrist strap. For details, see 1 Safety Instructions.

Step 2 Determine the rack number and chassis number of the server to be removed, and label its
panel to prevent misoperations.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 230


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 7 Replacing Parts

Step 3 Power off the RH2288H V3. For details, see 4.2 Powering Off the Server.
Step 4 Remove all external cables such as power and network cables.
Step 5 Remove the RH2288H V3 and put it on an ESD desktop. For details, see 3.5 Removing the
RH2288H V3.
Step 6 Remove the chassis cover. For details, see 7.11 Removing the Chassis Cover.
Step 7 Remove the PCIe card from the mainboard. For details, see 7.21.2 Removing a PCIe Card
from the Mainboard.
Step 8 Press the SD card in the arrow direction. See step (1) in Figure 7-131.

Figure 7-131 Removing an SD card

Step 9 Remove the SD card from the connector on the mainboard. See step (2) in Figure 7-131.
Step 10 Place the removed SD card in an ESD bag.

----End

7.50 Installing an SD Card


Install an SD card to replace the original one.
One or two SD cards can be installed on a server and are monitored by the BMC. If two SD
cards are installed, RAID 1 is configured by default. The two SD cards do not work in active/
standby mode and data synchronization between them may result in data overwriting. It is
recommended that you ensure that the SD card to be added contains no data, avoiding data
synchronization exceptions.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 231


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 7 Replacing Parts

Procedure
Step 1 Wear an ESD wrist strap. For details, see 1 Safety Instructions.

Step 2 Remove the SD card to be replaced. For details, see 7.49 Removing an SD Card.

Step 3 Take the spare SD card out of its ESD bag.

Step 4 Insert the SD card into the connector on the mainboard. See Figure 7-132.

Figure 7-132 Installing an SD card

Step 5 Install the chassis cover. For details, see 7.12 Installing the Chassis Cover.

Step 6 Install the RH2288H V3. For details, see 3.3 Installing a Server.

Step 7 Connect all internal cables such as power and network cables. For details, see 3.4 Connecting
External Cables.

Step 8 Power on the RH2288H V3. For details, see 4.1 Powering On the Server.

----End

7.51 Removing the Front Hard Disk Backplane


Remove the front hard disk backplane before replacing it with a new one.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 232


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 7 Replacing Parts

Procedure
Step 1 Wear an ESD wrist strap. For details, see 1 Safety Instructions.

Step 2 Determine the rack number and chassis number of the server to be removed, and label its
panel to prevent misoperations.
Step 3 Power off the RH2288H V3. For details, see 4.2 Powering Off the Server.

Step 4 Remove all external cables such as power and network cables.

Step 5 Remove the RH2288H V3 and put it on an ESD desktop. For details, see 3.5 Removing the
RH2288H V3.
Step 6 Remove the chassis cover. For details, see 7.11 Removing the Chassis Cover.

Step 7 Remove all hard disks. For details, see 7.5 Removing a Hard Disk.

Step 8 Install full-height full-length riser cards if they are required. For details, see 7.19 Removing
the Riser Card.
Step 9 Remove the air duct. For details, see 7.13 Removing the Air Duct.

Step 10 Remove all fan modules. For details, see 7.15 Removing a Fan Module.

Step 11 Remove the cables between the front hard disk backplane and the mainboard and between the
front hard disk backplane and the RAID controller card. For details, see 2.7 Internal
Cabling.
Step 12 Press and open the latch of the hard disk backplane. Lift the hard disk backplane and remove
it in the arrow direction. See Figure 7-133.
NOTE

The following figure shows how to remove a 2.5-inch hard disk backplane. You can remove a 3.5-inch
hard disk backplane in the same way.

Figure 7-133 Removing the hard disk backplane

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 233


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 7 Replacing Parts

Step 13 Place the removed hard disk backplane in an ESD bag.

----End

7.52 Installing the Front Hard Disk Backplane


Install a hard disk backplane to replace the original one.

Procedure
Step 1 Wear an ESD wrist strap. For details, see 1 Safety Instructions.

Step 2 Remove the front hard disk backplane to be replaced. For details, see 7.51 Removing the
Front Hard Disk Backplane.
Step 3 Take the spare front hard disk backplane out of its ESD bag.

Step 4 Hook the hard disk backplane, and push it in the arrow direction until the latch is locked and
it does not move. See Figure 7-134.
NOTE
This procedure uses a backplane with twelve 3.5-inch hard disks as an example. The same installation method
applies to other backplanes.

Figure 7-134 Installing the hard disk backplane

NOTE
If the RH2288H V3 is equipped with two RAID controller cards for 12 hard disks or 25 hard disks, you
need upgrade the CPLD of a front hard disk backplane to the latest version after installing the front hard
disk backplane.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 234


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 7 Replacing Parts

Step 5 Connect the cable of the front hard disk to the server. For details, see 2.7 Internal Cabling.

NOTICE
To prevent the hard disk backplane from being damaged, observe the following points when
you connect a 12-bay NVMe PCIe SSD extender adapter to the Slimline cables of the hard
disk backplane:
1. Install the cable connector vertically into the hard disk backplane port. See step 1 in
Figure 7-135.
2. When organizing cables, fix the cable ends that are near the hard disk backplane and
organize the cable ends that are away from the hard disk backplane to avoid pulling the
cables near the hard disk backplane. See steps 2 and 3 in Figure 7-135.

Figure 7-135 Installing a 12-bay NVMe hard disk backplane

Step 6 Install the front hard disk.

Step 7 Install the fan modules. For details, see 7.16 Installing a Fan Module.

Step 8 Install full-height full-length riser cards if they are required. For details, see 7.19 Removing
the Riser Card.

Step 9 Install the air duct. For details, see 7.14 Installing the Air Duct.

Step 10 Install the chassis cover. For details, see 7.12 Installing the Chassis Cover.

Step 11 Install the RH2288H V3. For details, see 3.3 Installing a Server.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 235


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 7 Replacing Parts

Step 12 Connect all internal cables such as power and network cables. For details, see 3.4 Connecting
External Cables.
Step 13 Power on the RH2288H V3. For details, see 4.1 Powering On the Server.

----End

7.53 Removing the Rear Hard Disk Backplane


Remove the rear hard disk backplane before replacing it with a new one.

Procedure
Step 1 Wear an ESD wrist strap. For details, see 1 Safety Instructions.

Step 2 Determine the rack number and chassis number of the server to be removed, and label its
panel to prevent misoperations.
Step 3 Power off the RH2288H V3. For details, see 4.2 Powering Off the Server.

Step 4 Remove all external cables such as power and network cables.

Step 5 Remove the RH2288H V3 and put it on an ESD desktop. For details, see 3.5 Removing the
RH2288H V3.
Step 6 Remove the chassis cover. For details, see 7.11 Removing the Chassis Cover.

Step 7 Determine the position for removing the rear hard disk backplane. Figure 7-136 shows an
example.

Figure 7-136 Position for removing the rear hard disk backplane

Step 8 Remove the rear hard disks from the rear hard disk backplane.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 236


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 7 Replacing Parts

Step 9 Disconnect all cables from the rear hard disk backplane. For details, see 2.7 Internal
Cabling.

Step 10 Loosen the screws that secure the rear hard disk module, and lift the module. See Figure
7-137.

Figure 7-137 Removing the rear hard disk module

Step 11 Loosen the screws on the rear hard disk backplane. Remove the rear hard disk backplane by
taking it down. See steps (1) and (2) in Figure 7-138.

Figure 7-138 Removing the rear hard disk backplane

Step 12 Place the removed hard disk backplane in an ESD bag.

----End

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 237


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 7 Replacing Parts

7.54 Installing the Rear Hard Disk Backplane


Install a rear hard disk backplane to replace the original one.

Procedure
Step 1 Wear an ESD wrist strap. For details, see 1 Safety Instructions.

Step 2 Remove the rear hard disk backplane to be replaced. For details, see 7.53 Removing the Rear
Hard Disk Backplane.
Step 3 Take the spare rear hard disk backplane out of its ESD bag.

Step 4 Insert the rear hard disk backplane in the arrow direction until it does not move, and tighten
the screw to secure the rear hard disk backplane. See steps (1) and (2) in Figure 7-139.

Figure 7-139 Installing the rear hard disk backplane

Step 5 Install the rear hard disk module into the chassis and tighten the screws. See Figure 7-140.

Figure 7-140 Installing the rear hard disk module

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 238


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 7 Replacing Parts

Step 6 Connect cables to the rear hard disk backplane.

Figure 7-141 shows the cable connections to the rear hard disk backplane for all 3.5-inch
hard disks. Figure 7-142 shows the cable connections to the rear hard disk backplane for all
2.5-inch hard disks. If the server uses both 3.5-inch hard disks and 2.5-inch hard disks, refer
to both Figure 7-141 and Figure 7-142 for cable connections.

The ports with the same number in Figure 7-141 and Figure 7-142 are connected to each
other. The tables below list the meanings of the ports.

Figure 7-141 Cable connections to the rear hard disk backplane for all 3.5-inch hard disks

2
5

3
4

1 Port to an indicator cable 2 Port to an indicator cable


3 Port to a mini-SAS HD signal 4 Port to an indicator cable
cable
5 Port to a power cable

Figure 7-142 Cable connections to the rear hard disk backplane for all 2.5-inch hard disks

2
5
3
4

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 239


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 7 Replacing Parts

1 Port to an indicator cable 2 Port to an indicator cable


3 Port to a mini-SAS HD signal 4 Port to an indicator cable
cable
5 Port to a power cable

Step 7 Install rear hard disks.

Step 8 Install the chassis cover. For details, see 7.12 Installing the Chassis Cover.

Step 9 Install the RH2288H V3. For details, see 3.3 Installing a Server.

Step 10 Connect all internal cables such as power and network cables. For details, see 3.4 Connecting
External Cables.
Step 11 Power on the RH2288H V3. For details, see 4.1 Powering On the Server.

----End

7.55 Removing the VGA Board


Remove the video graphics array (VGA) board before replacing it with a new one.

With Eight 3.5-inch Hard Disks


Step 1 Wear an ESD wrist strap. For details, see 1 Safety Instructions.

Step 2 Determine the rack number and chassis number of the server to be removed, and label its
panel to prevent misoperations.
Step 3 Power off the RH2288H V3. For details, see 4.2 Powering Off the Server.

Step 4 Remove all external cables such as power and network cables.

Step 5 Remove the RH2288H V3 and put it on an ESD desktop. For details, see 3.5 Removing the
RH2288H V3.
Step 6 Remove the chassis cover. For details, see 7.11 Removing the Chassis Cover.

Step 7 Remove the air duct. For details, see 7.13 Removing the Air Duct.

Step 8 Remove all fan modules. For details, see 7.15 Removing a Fan Module.

Step 9 Press and hold down the latches on both sides of a fan module bracket, and lift the bracket.
Use the same method to lift the other fan module bracket. See steps (1) and (2) in Figure
7-143.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 240


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 7 Replacing Parts

Figure 7-143 Removing fan module brackets

Step 10 Locate the cables connecting the mainboard and the front hard disk backplane to the DVD
ROM drive or the LCD and the VGA board, and disconnect the cables from the mainboard
and the front hard disk backplane. For details, see 2.7 Internal Cabling.
Step 11 Loosen and remove the screws on the server. See step (1) in Figure 7-144.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 241


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 7 Replacing Parts

Figure 7-144 Removing the VGA board from a server with eight 3.5-inch hard disks

Step 12 Push the panel out of the server. See step (2) in Figure 7-144.
Step 13 Remove all cables connected to the VGA board.
Step 14 Loosen the screws on the VGA board. See step (3) in Figure 7-144.
Step 15 Remove the VGA board in the arrow direction. See step (4) in Figure 7-144.
Step 16 Place the removed VGA board in an ESD bag.

----End

With Eight 2.5-inch Hard Disks


Step 1 Wear an ESD wrist strap. For details, see 1 Safety Instructions.
Step 2 Determine the rack number and chassis number of the server to be removed, and label its
panel to prevent misoperations.
Step 3 Power off the RH2288H V3. For details, see 4.2 Powering Off the Server.
Step 4 Remove all external cables such as power and network cables.
Step 5 Remove the RH2288H V3 and put it on an ESD desktop. For details, see 3.5 Removing the
RH2288H V3.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 242


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 7 Replacing Parts

Step 6 Remove the chassis cover. For details, see 7.11 Removing the Chassis Cover.

Step 7 Remove the air duct. For details, see 7.13 Removing the Air Duct.

Step 8 Remove all fan modules. For details, see 7.15 Removing a Fan Module.

Step 9 Press and hold down the latches on both sides of a fan module bracket, and lift the bracket.
Use the same method to lift the other fan module bracket. See steps (1) and (2) in Figure
7-145.

Figure 7-145 Removing fan module brackets

Step 10 Locate the cables connecting the mainboard and the front hard disk backplane to the DVD
ROM drive or the LCD and the VGA board, and disconnect the cables from the mainboard
and the front hard disk backplane. For details, see 2.7 Internal Cabling.
Step 11 Lift the bolt that secures the tray. See step (1) in Figure 7-146.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 243


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 7 Replacing Parts

Figure 7-146 Removing the tray

Step 12 Push the tray out of the chassis in the arrow direction. See step (2) in Figure 7-146.

Step 13 Remove all cables connected to the VGA board.

Step 14 Unscrew the VGA board. See step (1) in Figure 7-147.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 244


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 7 Replacing Parts

Figure 7-147 Removing the VGA board from a server with eight 2.5-inch hard disks

Step 15 Remove the VGA board in the arrow direction. See step (2) in Figure 7-147.

Step 16 Place the removed VGA board in an ESD bag.

----End

7.56 Installing the VGA Board


Install a video graphics array (VGA) board to replace the original one.

With Eight 3.5-inch Hard Disks


Step 1 Wear an ESD wrist strap. For details, see 1 Safety Instructions.

Step 2 Remove the VGA board to be replaced. For details, see 7.55 Removing the VGA Board.

Step 3 Take the spare VGA board out of its ESD bag.

Step 4 Insert the VGA board into the panel. See step (1) in Figure 7-148.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 245


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 7 Replacing Parts

Figure 7-148 Installing the VGA board on a server with eight 3.5-inch hard disks

Step 5 Tighten the screws to secure the VGA board to the panel. See step (2) in Figure 7-148.

Step 6 Connect cables to the VGA board.

Step 7 Push the panel into the server in the arrow direction. See step (3) in Figure 7-148.

Step 8 Tighten the screws on the server. See step (4) in Figure 7-148.
NOTE
If fan modules have been installed, remove them and the fan support before tightening the screws.

Step 9 Connect all cables between the VGA board and the DVD drive or LCD. For details, see 2.7
Internal Cabling.
Step 10 Install the fan module brackets in the chassis. See Figure 7-149.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 246


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 7 Replacing Parts

Figure 7-149 Installing fan module brackets

Step 11 Install the fan modules. For details, see 7.16 Installing a Fan Module.

Step 12 Install the air duct. For details, see 7.14 Installing the Air Duct.

Step 13 Install the chassis cover. For details, see 7.12 Installing the Chassis Cover.

Step 14 Install the RH2288H V3. For details, see 3.3 Installing a Server.

Step 15 Connect all internal cables such as power and network cables. For details, see 3.4 Connecting
External Cables.
Step 16 Power on the RH2288H V3. For details, see 4.1 Powering On the Server.

----End

With Eight 2.5-inch Hard Disks


Step 1 Wear an ESD wrist strap. For details, see 1 Safety Instructions.

Step 2 Remove the VGA board to be replaced. For details, see 7.55 Removing the VGA Board.

Step 3 Take the spare VGA board out of its ESD bag.

Step 4 Insert the VGA board into the tray. See step (1) in Figure 7-150.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 247


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 7 Replacing Parts

Figure 7-150 Installing the VGA board on a server with eight 2.5-inch hard disks

Step 5 Tighten the screws to secure the VGA board to the tray. See step (2) in Figure 7-150.

Step 6 Connect cables to the VGA board.

Step 7 Push the tray into the chassis in the arrow direction. See Figure 7-151.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 248


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 7 Replacing Parts

Figure 7-151 Installing the VGA board

Step 8 Connect all cables between the VGA board and the DVD drive or LCD. For details, see 2.7
Internal Cabling.
Step 9 Install the fan module brackets in the chassis. See Figure 7-152.

Figure 7-152 Installing fan module brackets

Step 10 Install the fan modules. For details, see 7.16 Installing a Fan Module.

Step 11 Install the air duct. For details, see 7.14 Installing the Air Duct.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 249


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 7 Replacing Parts

Step 12 Install the chassis cover. For details, see 7.12 Installing the Chassis Cover.
Step 13 Install the RH2288H V3. For details, see 3.3 Installing a Server.
Step 14 Connect all internal cables such as power and network cables. For details, see 3.4 Connecting
External Cables.
Step 15 Power on the RH2288H V3. For details, see 4.1 Powering On the Server.
----End

7.57 Removing the PSU Backplane


Remove the power supply unit (PSU) backplane before replacing it with a new one.

Procedure
Step 1 Wear an ESD wrist strap. For details, see 1 Safety Instructions.
Step 2 Determine the rack number and chassis number of the server to be removed, and label its
panel to prevent misoperations.
Step 3 Power off the RH2288H V3. For details, see 4.2 Powering Off the Server.
Step 4 Remove all external cables such as power and network cables.
Step 5 Remove the RH2288H V3 and put it on an ESD desktop. For details, see 3.5 Removing the
RH2288H V3.
Step 6 Remove the chassis cover. For details, see 7.11 Removing the Chassis Cover.
Step 7 Remove the air duct. For details, see 7.13 Removing the Air Duct.
Step 8 Remove all PSUs. For details, see 7.9 Removing a PSU.
Step 9 Remove all cables from the PSU backplane.
Step 10 Lift the PSU backplane to remove it. See Figure 7-153.

Figure 7-153 Removing the PSU backplane

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 250


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 7 Replacing Parts

Step 11 Place the removed PSU backplane in an ESD bag.

----End

7.58 Installing the PSU Backplane


Install a PSU backplane to replace the original one.

Procedure
Step 1 Wear an ESD wrist strap. For details, see 1 Safety Instructions.
Step 2 Remove the PSU backplane to be replaced. For details, see 7.57 Removing the PSU
Backplane.
Step 3 Take the spare PSU backplane out of its ESD bag.
Step 4 Place the PSU backplane in the planned position, and push it downward until it cannot move.
See Figure 7-154.

Figure 7-154 Installing the PSU backplane

Step 5 Connect cables to the PSU backplane. For details, see 2.7 Internal Cabling.
Step 6 Install PSUs. For details, see 7.10 Installing a PSU.
Step 7 Install the air duct. For details, see 7.14 Installing the Air Duct.
Step 8 Install the RH2288H V3. For details, see 3.3 Installing a Server.
Step 9 Connect all internal cables such as power and network cables. For details, see 3.4 Connecting
External Cables.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 251


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 7 Replacing Parts

Step 10 Power on the RH2288H V3. For details, see 4.1 Powering On the Server.

----End

7.59 Removing the Left Mounting Ear


Remove the left mounting ear before replacing it with a new one.

Procedure
Step 1 Wear an ESD wrist strap. For details, see 1 Safety Instructions.
Step 2 Determine the rack number and chassis number of the server to be removed, and label its
panel to prevent misoperations.
Step 3 Power off the RH2288H V3. For details, see 4.2 Powering Off the Server.
Step 4 Remove all external cables such as power and network cables.
Step 5 Remove the RH2288H V3 and put it on an ESD desktop. For details, see 3.5 Removing the
RH2288H V3.
Step 6 Remove the chassis cover. For details, see 7.11 Removing the Chassis Cover.
Step 7 Remove full-height full-length riser cards if they are installed. For details, see 7.19 Removing
the Riser Card.
Step 8 Remove the air duct. For details, see 7.13 Removing the Air Duct.
Step 9 Remove all fan modules. For details, see 7.15 Removing a Fan Module.
Step 10 Press and hold down the latches on both sides of a fan module bracket, and lift the bracket.
Use the same method to lift the other fan module bracket. See steps (1) and (2) in Figure
7-155.

Figure 7-155 Removing fan module brackets

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 252


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 7 Replacing Parts

Step 11 Remove the mounting ear signal cable in the arrow direction. See step (1) in Figure 7-156.

Figure 7-156 Removing the left mounting ear

Step 12 Loosen the screws on the left mounting ear. See step (2) in Figure 7-156.

Step 13 Remove the left mounting ear in the arrow direction and slowly pull the mounting ear signal
cable out of the chassis along the chassis interior surface. See step (3) in Figure 7-156.

Step 14 Place the removed left mounting ear in an ESD bag.

----End

7.60 Installing the Left Mounting Ear


Install a left mounting ear to replacing the original one.

Procedure
Step 1 Wear an ESD wrist strap. For details, see 1 Safety Instructions.

Step 2 Remove the left mounting ear to be replaced. For details, see 7.59 Removing the Left
Mounting Ear.

Step 3 Take the spare left mounting ear out of its ESD bag.

Step 4 Route the mounting ear signal cable through the chassis in the arrow direction. See step (1) in
Figure 7-157.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 253


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 7 Replacing Parts

Figure 7-157 Installing the left mounting ear

Step 5 Connect the mounting ear signal cable to the left mounting ear connector (J42) on the
mainboard. See step (2) in Figure 7-157.
Step 6 Install the mounting ear in the arrow direction. See step (3) in Figure 7-157.
Step 7 Tighten the screws on the left mounting ear. See step (4) in Figure 7-157.
Step 8 Install the fan module brackets in the chassis. See Figure 7-158.

Figure 7-158 Installing fan module brackets

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 254


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 7 Replacing Parts

Step 9 Install the fan modules. For details, see 7.16 Installing a Fan Module.

Step 10 Install the air duct. For details, see 7.14 Installing the Air Duct.

Step 11 Install full-height full-length riser cards if they are required. For details, see 7.20 Installing a
Riser Card.
Step 12 Install the chassis cover. For details, see 7.12 Installing the Chassis Cover.

Step 13 Install the RH2288H V3. For details, see 3.3 Installing a Server.

Step 14 Connect all internal cables such as power and network cables. For details, see 3.4 Connecting
External Cables.
Step 15 Power on the RH2288H V3. For details, see 4.1 Powering On the Server.

----End

7.61 Removing the Right Mounting Ear


Remove the right mounting ear before replacing it with a new one.

Procedure
Step 1 Wear an ESD wrist strap. For details, see 1 Safety Instructions.

Step 2 Determine the rack number and chassis number of the server to be removed, and label its
panel to prevent misoperations.
Step 3 Power off the RH2288H V3. For details, see 4.2 Powering Off the Server.

Step 4 Remove all external cables such as power and network cables.

Step 5 Remove the RH2288H V3 and put it on an ESD desktop. For details, see 3.5 Removing the
RH2288H V3.
Step 6 Remove the chassis cover. For details, see 7.11 Removing the Chassis Cover.

Step 7 Remove full-height full-length riser cards if they are installed. For details, see 7.19 Removing
the Riser Card.
Step 8 Remove the air duct. For details, see 7.13 Removing the Air Duct.

Step 9 Remove all fan modules. For details, see 7.15 Removing a Fan Module.

Step 10 Press and hold down the latches on both sides of a fan module bracket, and lift the bracket.
Use the same method to lift the other fan module bracket. See steps (1) and (2) in Figure
7-159.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 255


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 7 Replacing Parts

Figure 7-159 Removing fan module brackets

Step 11 Press and hold down the latch of the mounting ear signal cable, and remove the cable in the
arrow direction. See steps (1) and (2) in Figure 7-160.

Figure 7-160 Removing the right mounting ear

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 256


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 7 Replacing Parts

Step 12 Loosen the screws on the right mounting ear. See step (3) in Figure 7-160.

Step 13 Remove the right mounting ear in the arrow direction and slowly pull the mounting ear signal
cable out of the chassis along the chassis interior surface. See step (4) in Figure 7-160.

Step 14 Place the removed right mounting ear in an ESD bag.

----End

7.62 Installing the Right Mounting Ear


Install a right mounting ear to replace the original one.

Procedure
Step 1 Wear an ESD wrist strap. For details, see 1 Safety Instructions.

Step 2 Remove the right mounting ear to be replaced. For details, see 7.61 Removing the Right
Mounting Ear.

Step 3 Take the spare right mounting ear out of its ESD bag.

Step 4 Route the mounting ear signal cable through the chassis in the arrow direction. See step (1) in
Figure 7-161.

Figure 7-161 Installing the right mounting ear

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 257


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 7 Replacing Parts

Step 5 Remove the adhesive backing from the signal cable and route the signal cable along the
grooves within the compute node. Bend the signal cable only along its black lines. See Figure
7-162.

Figure 7-162 Bending the signal cable

Step 6 Connect the mounting ear signal cable to the right mounting ear connector (J43) on the
mainboard. See step (2) in Figure 7-161.
NOTE
Ensure that the blue side of the signal cable faces upwards when connecting the cable. Do not use excessive
force when connecting or removing the cable.

Step 7 Install the mounting ear in the arrow direction. See step (3) in Figure 7-161.

Step 8 Tighten the screw on the right mounting ear. See step (4) in Figure 7-161.

Step 9 Install the fan module brackets in the chassis. See Figure 7-163.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 258


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 7 Replacing Parts

Figure 7-163 Installing fan module brackets

Step 10 Install the fan modules. For details, see 7.16 Installing a Fan Module.
Step 11 Install the air duct. For details, see 7.14 Installing the Air Duct.
Step 12 Install full-height full-length riser cards if they are required. For details, see 7.20 Installing a
Riser Card.
Step 13 Install the chassis cover. For details, see 7.12 Installing the Chassis Cover.
Step 14 Install the RH2288H V3. For details, see 3.3 Installing a Server.
Step 15 Connect all internal cables such as power and network cables. For details, see 3.4 Connecting
External Cables.
Step 16 Power on the RH2288H V3. For details, see 4.1 Powering On the Server.

----End

7.63 Removing an M.2 SATA SSD Card


Remove an M.2 SATA SSD card before replacing it with a new one. An M.2 SSD riser card
can be configured with two M.2 SATA SSD cards. The replacement method is the same for
the two M.2 SATA SSD cards. An M.2 SATA SSD card using the external SATA1 port is used
as an example in this topic.

Procedure
Step 1 Wear an ESD wrist strap. For details, see 1 Safety Instructions.
Step 2 Determine the rack number and chassis number of the server to be removed, and label its
panel to prevent misoperations.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 259


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 7 Replacing Parts

Step 3 Power off the RH2288H V3. For details, see 4.2 Powering Off the Server.
Step 4 Remove all external cables such as power and network cables.
Step 5 Remove the RH2288H V3 and put it on an ESD desktop. For details, see 3.5 Removing the
RH2288H V3.
Step 6 Remove the chassis cover. For details, see 7.11 Removing the Chassis Cover.
Step 7 Remove the cables from the M.2 SSD riser card. For details, see 2.7.1 Internal Cabling for
an M.2 SSD Riser Card.
Step 8 Remove the M.2 SSD riser card.
l For details about how to remove an M.2 SSD riser card from the mainboard, see 7.21.2
Removing a PCIe Card from the Mainboard.
l For details about how to remove an M.2 SSD riser card from a riser card, see 7.21.1
Removing a PCIe Card from a Riser Card.
Step 9 Loosen the screw on the M.2 SATA SSD card using an M3 Phillips screwdriver. See step (1)
in Figure 7-164.

Figure 7-164 Removing an M.2 SATA SSD card

Step 10 Lift the screw end of the M.2 SATA SSD card upwards and pull it out at a 20 to 30 angle.
See step (2) in Figure 7-164.
Step 11 Place the removed M.2 SATA SSD card in an ESD bag.

----End

7.64 Installing an M.2 SATA SSD Card


Install an M.2 SATA SSD card to replace the original one. An M.2 SSD riser card can be
configured with two M.2 SATA SSD cards. The replacement method is the same for the two

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 260


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 7 Replacing Parts

M.2 SATA SSD cards. An M.2 SATA SSD card using the external SATA1 port is used as an
example in this topic.

Procedure
Step 1 Wear an ESD wrist strap. For details, see 1 Safety Instructions.

Step 2 Remove the M.2 SATA SSD card to be replaced. For details, see 7.63 Removing an M.2
SATA SSD Card.
Step 3 Take the spare M.2 SATA SSD card out of its ESD bag.

Step 4 Slot the M.2 SATA SSD card into the M.2 SSD riser at a 20 to 30 angle and position it
horizontally. See step (1) in Figure 7-165.

Figure 7-165 Installing an M.2 SATA SSD card

Step 5 Tighten the screw on the M.2 SATA SSD card. See step (2) in Figure 7-165.

Step 6 Install the M.2 SSD riser card.


l For details about how to install an M.2 SSD riser card on the mainboard, see 7.22.2
Installing a PCIe Card on the Mainboard.
l For details about how to install an M.2 SSD riser card on a riser card, see 7.22.1
Installing a PCIe Card on the Riser Card.
Step 7 Connect the cable to the M.2 SSD riser card. For details, see 2.7.1 Internal Cabling for an
M.2 SSD Riser Card.
Step 8 Install the chassis cover. For details, see 7.12 Installing the Chassis Cover.

Step 9 Install the RH2288H V3. For details, see 3.3 Installing a Server.

Step 10 Connect all internal cables such as power and network cables. For details, see 3.4 Connecting
External Cables.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 261


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 7 Replacing Parts

Step 11 Power on the RH2288H V3. For details, see 4.1 Powering On the Server.

----End

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 262


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 8 Troubleshooting Guide

8 Troubleshooting Guide

For details about how to troubleshoot Huawei servers, see Huawei Server Troubleshooting
Guide. It covers the following content:
l Troubleshooting process
l Fault information collection
l Fault diagnosis
l Software and firmware upgrade
l Preventive maintenance

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 263


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 9 Common Operations

9 Common Operations

About This Chapter

This topic describes RH2288H V3 common operations.


9.1 Querying the IP Address of the Management Network Port
9.2 Logging In to the iBMC WebUI
9.3 Logging In to the iBMC CLI
9.4 Logging In to a Server Using the Independent Remote Console
9.5 Logging In to the Remote Virtual Console
9.6 Querying the Mapping Between NVMe PCIe SSD Drive Letters, Slot IDs, and Bus IDs in
Linux

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 264


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 9 Common Operations

9.1 Querying the IP Address of the Management Network


Port

Methods
To check the IP address of the management network port, you can use any of the following
methods:
l Query the default IP address.
l Query the IP address in the basic input/output system (BIOS). For details, see this topic.
l Log in to iBMC CLI through the serial port and run the ipmcget d ipinfo command.
For details, see HUAWEI Rack Server iBMC User Guide.
l Query the IP address by using the LCD.

Querying the Default IP Address


Table 9-1 lists the default IP address of the iBMC management network port.

Table 9-1 Default IP address


Product Model IP Address

RH2288H V3 192.168.2.100

Querying the IP Address in the BIOS


Step 1 Restart the server.
1. Connect a mouse and a keyboard to the two USB ports on the server.
2. Use a VGA cable to connect a monitor to the VGA port on the server.
3. Restart the OS.
4. Press Delete repeatedly when the screen shown in the following figure is displayed
during server startup.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 265


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 9 Common Operations

Figure 9-1 BIOS startup screen

5. Enter a BIOS password as prompted. The screen for setting the BIOS is displayed.
Step 2 Choose Advanced > IPMI iBMC Configuration and press Enter.
The IPMI iBMC Configuration screen is displayed.
Step 3 Select iBMC Configuration and press Enter.
The iBMC Configuration screen is displayed, showing information about the IP address of
the iBMC network port. See Figure 9-2.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 266


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 9 Common Operations

Figure 9-2 iBMC Configuration

----End

Querying the IP Address By Using the LCD


Step 1 Switch to the Setting screen.
1. On the liquid crystal display (LCD), click the Setting tab.

The Setting screen is displayed, as shown in Figure 9-3.

Figure 9-3 Setting

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 267


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 9 Common Operations

----End

9.2 Logging In to the iBMC WebUI


Log in to the iBMC WebUI using a PC that that has Windows 7 and Internet Explorer 8.0
installed.
Before using the remote control function, ensure that the OS, browser, and Java Runtime
Environment (JRE) of the required versions have been installed on the local PC. For details
about software versions, see HUAWEI Rack Server iBMC User Guide.
Ensure that the local PC meets the following networking conditions:
l The local PC is connected to the iBMC management network port on the server by using
a network cable.
l The IP addresses of the local PC and the iBMC management network port are on the
same network segment.
Table 9-2 lists the data to be obtained before you log in to the iBMC WebUI.

Table 9-2 Data to be obtained


Type Paramete Description Example
r

User User name User name for logging in to the iBMC WebUI root
login
informat Password User password for logging in to the iBMC Huawei12#$
ion WebUI
NOTE
The default iBMC user name is root, which belongs
to the administrator group. The default password is
Huawei12#$.

IP address IP address of the iBMC management network 192.168.2.100


port on the server

Procedure
Step 1 Connect the local PC to the iBMC management network port on the server by using a network
cable.
Figure 9-4 shows the network diagram.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 268


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 9 Common Operations

Figure 9-4 Network diagram

Step 2 Open a browser, such as Internet Explorer, on the PC.

Step 3 In the address box, enter the iBMC address in the format of https://IP address of the iBMC
management network port on the server (for example, https://192.168.2.100).

Step 4 Press Enter.

The iBMC login page is displayed, as shown in Figure 9-5.

NOTE

l If the message "There is a problem with this website's security certificate" is displayed, click Continue to
this website (not recommended).
l If the system displays the Security Alert dialog box indicating a certificate error, click Yes.

Figure 9-5 Logging in to iBMC

Step 5 On the login page, enter the user name and password for logging in to the iBMC WebUI.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 269


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 9 Common Operations

NOTE

Your user account will be locked after five consecutive login failures with wrong passwords. If your user
account is locked, log in again 5 minutes later.

Step 6 Select This iBMC from the Domain drop-down list.


Step 7 Click Log In.
The Information Summary page is displayed, showing the user name in the upper right
corner.

----End

9.3 Logging In to the iBMC CLI


You can log in to the iBMC CLI to manage and monitor the device. There are different ways
to access the CLI of the management software. Choose a way based on site requirements.
To log in to the iBMC CLI over the network port, ensure that:
l The network port on the client is properly connected to the management network port on
the server by using a network cable.
l The IP addresses of the client network port and the management network port are on the
same network segment.
Prepare the following data before logging in to the iBMC CLI:
l IP address of the iBMC management network port
l User name and password of the iBMC management network port
The default iBMC user name is root, and the default password is Huawei12#$.

Procedure
Logging In over SSH
The SSH protocol is used to provide secure remote login and other network services on an
insecure network.
NOTE
SSH is used by default to log in to iBMC. If the SSH service is disabled, enable it by choosing Config >
Service Settings on the iBMC web user interface (WebUI).

To log in to the CLI over SSH, perform the following operations:


l In Linux
a. Connect the network port of the configuration terminal to the management network
port of the server.
b. Run the following command in the terminal tool to log in to the iBMC CLI:
ssh ipaddress
l In Windows
a. Download and install the client communications tool that supports SSH.
b. Connect the network port of the configuration terminal to the management network
port of the server.
c. Enter the user name, password, and IP address of the management network port on
the client communications tool to log in to the iBMC CLI.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 270


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 9 Common Operations

Logging In over Telnet

Telnet is insecure and is disabled by default. To log in to iBMC over Telnet, enable the Telnet
service by choosing Config > Service Settings on the iBMC WebUI.

To log in to the iBMC CLI over Telnet, perform the following operations:
l In Linux
a. Connect the network port of the configuration terminal to the management network
port of the server.
b. Run the following command in the terminal tool to log in to the iBMC CLI:
telnet ipaddress
l In Windows
a. Connect the network port of the configuration terminal to the management network
port of the server.
b. Run the following command in the terminal tool to log in to the iBMC CLI:
telnet ipaddress

----End

9.4 Logging In to a Server Using the Independent Remote


Console
When the client OS and iBMC version meet requirements for the independent remote console,
logging in to the real-time desktop of a server using the independent remote console is more
convenient than that using the remote virtual console accessed through the iBMC WebUI.

The independent remote console can run in an environment that meets the requirements listed
in Table 9-3.

Table 9-3 Environmental requirements


Client OS Client OS Version Management Software
Type

Windows Windows 7 32-bit or 64-bit iBMC 2.28 or later

Windows 8 32-bit or 64-bit

Windows 10 32-bit or 64-bit

Windows Server 2008 R2 32-bit or


64-bit

Windows Server 2012 64-bit

Ubuntu Ubuntu 14.04 LTS

Ubuntu 16.04 LTS

Mac Mac OS X El Capitan

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 271


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 9 Common Operations

Ensure that the following requirements are met before logging in to the real-time desktop of a
server:
l The client (for example, a PC) is connected to the iBMC management network port of
the server to be accessed.
l You have obtained the iBMC management network port IP address and port number
(HTTPS port number).
l You have obtained the user name and password for logging in to iBMC.
l You have downloaded the Independent Remote Console software package to a client,
such as a PC, and decompressed the package.
Download link: Independent Remote Console
NOTE

l kvm_client_windows.zip is for Windows OSs.


l kvm_client_ubuntu.zip is for Ubuntu OSs.
l kvm_client_mac.zip is for Mac OSs.

Procedure
l Logging In to a Server Using the Independent Remote Console (Windows)
a. Configure an IP address for the client (PC) to enable communication between the
client and the iBMC. That is, the IP address configured and the iBMC management
network port IP address must be in the same network segment.
b. Double-click KVM.exe. The independent remote console interface is displayed, as
shown in Figure 9-6.

Figure 9-6 Login interface

c. Enter the network address, user name, and password as instructed.


The network address can be in any of the following formats:
n iBMC management network port IP address (IPv4 or IPv6 address):Port
number
n iBMC domain name address:Port number

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 272


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 9 Common Operations

NOTE

l Enter an IPv6 address in brackets, and an IPv4 address directly. For example, [2001::64]:444,
and 192.168.100.1:444.
l The default port number 443 can be skipped.
d. Select the login mode, and click Connect.
n Shared Mode: allows two users to access and manage a server at the same
time. The two users can see each other's operations.
n Private Mode: allows only one user to access and manage a server.
Information shown in Figure 9-7 is displayed.

Figure 9-7 Security risk information

e. Perform any of the following operations based on actual situation:


n Click Yes to open the KVM console.
n Click No to return to the login interface.
n Click Import CA to import the CA certificate (*.cer, *.crt, or *.pem). After
the CA certificate is imported, the security risk dialog box will no longer be
displayed.
The Remote Virtual Console of the server is displayed, as shown in Figure 9-8.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 273


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 9 Common Operations

Figure 9-8 The Remote Virtual Console of the server

l Logging In to a Server Using the Independent Remote Console (Ubuntu)


a. Configure an IP address for the client (PC) to enable communication between the
client and the iBMC. That is, the IP address configured and the iBMC management
network port IP address must be in the same network segment.
b. Open the console, and set the folder, in which the independent remote console is
stored, as the working folder.
c. Run the chmod 777 KVM.sh command to set the permission for the independent
remote console.
d. Run ./KVM.sh to start the independent remote console. The independent remote
console interface is displayed, as shown in Figure 9-9.

Figure 9-9 Login interface

e. Enter the network address, user name, and password as instructed.


The network address can be in any of the following formats:

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 274


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 9 Common Operations

n iBMC management network port IP address (IPv4 or IPv6 address):Port


number
n iBMC domain name address:Port number
NOTE

l Enter an IPv6 address in brackets, and an IPv4 address directly. For example, [2001::64]:444,
and 192.168.100.1:444.
l The default port number 443 can be skipped.
f. Select the login mode, and click Connect.
n Shared Mode: allows two users to access and manage a server at the same
time. The two users can see each other's operations.
n Private Mode: allows only one user to access and manage a server.
Information shown in Figure 9-10 is displayed.

Figure 9-10 Security risk information

g. Perform any of the following operations based on actual situation:


n Click Yes to open the KVM console.
n Click No to return to the login interface.
n Click Import CA to import the CA certificate (*.cer, *.crt, or*.pem). After
the CA certificate is imported, the security risk dialog box will no longer be
displayed.
The Remote Virtual Console of the server is displayed, as shown in Figure 9-11.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 275


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 9 Common Operations

Figure 9-11 The Remote Virtual Console of the server

l Logging In to a Server Using the Independent Remote Console (Mac)


a. Configure an IP address for the client (PC) to enable communication between the
client and the iBMC. That is, the IP address configured and the iBMC management
network port IP address must be in the same network segment.
b. Open the console, and set the folder, in which the independent remote console is
stored, as the working folder.
c. Run the chmod 777 KVM.sh command to set the permission for the independent
remote console.
d. Run ./KVM.sh to start the independent remote console. The independent remote
console interface is displayed, as shown in Figure 9-12.

Figure 9-12 Login interface

e. Enter the network address, user name, and password as instructed.


The network address can be in any of the following formats:

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 276


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 9 Common Operations

n iBMC management network port IP address (IPv4 or IPv6 address):Port


number
n iBMC domain name address:Port number
NOTE

l Enter an IPv6 address in brackets, and an IPv4 address directly. For example, [2001::64]:444,
and 192.168.100.1:444.
l The default port number 443 can be skipped.
f. Select the login mode, and click Connect.
n Shared Mode: allows two users to access and manage a server at the same
time. The two users can see each other's operations.
n Private Mode: allows only one user to access and manage a server.
Information shown in Figure 9-13 is displayed.

Figure 9-13 Security risk information

g. Perform any of the following operations based on actual situation:


n Click Yes to open the KVM console.
n Click No to return to the login interface.
n Click Import CA to import the CA certificate (*.cer, *.crt, or *.pem). After
the CA certificate is imported, the security risk dialog box will no longer be
displayed.
The Remote Virtual Console of the server is displayed, as shown in Figure 9-14.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 277


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 9 Common Operations

Figure 9-14 The Remote Virtual Console of the server

----End

9.5 Logging In to the Remote Virtual Console


Log in to the remote virtual console of the iBMC through the iBMC WebUI.
Prepare the following data before logging in to the remote virtual console:
l You have obtained the IP address for the RH2288H V3 iBMC management network
port.
l You have obtained the user name and password for logging in to iBMC.
The default user name is root, and the default password is Huawei12#$.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the iBMC WebUI.
For details, see 9.2 Logging In to the iBMC WebUI.
Step 2 Choose Remote.
The Remote page is displayed, as shown in Figure 9-15.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 278


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 9 Common Operations

Figure 9-15 Remote page

Step 3 Click Remote Virtual Console.


The real-time operation console is displayed, as shown in Figure 9-16.
NOTE

l Remote Virtual Console (Shared Mode): allows two users to access and operate the server
simultaneously. One user can view the operations performed by the other user.
l Remote Virtual Console (Private Mode): allows only one user to access and operate the server.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 279


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 9 Common Operations

Figure 9-16 Real-time operation console

----End

9.6 Querying the Mapping Between NVMe PCIe SSD


Drive Letters, Slot IDs, and Bus IDs in Linux
Query the mapping between NVMe PCIe SSD drive letters, slot IDs, and bus IDs in Linux
before removing NVMe PCIe SSDs.

Procedure
Step 1 Open the command terminal on the OS, run the cd /sys/bus/pci/slots and ll commands to
query a list of slot IDs, as shown in Figure 9-17.

Figure 9-17 Slot IDs

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 280


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 9 Common Operations

Step 2 Run the cat /sys/bus/pci/slots/$slot/address command to obtain the bus IDs that map to the
slot IDs, and record all bus IDs. As shown in Figure 9-18, slot 8 maps to bus ID 0000:81:00.
In the command, $slot indicates the slot ID of a hard disk. The value range is the list of slot
IDs queried in Figure 9-17.

Figure 9-18 Bus IDs that map to slot IDs

Step 3 Run the ls -l /sys/class/block/ command to query the mapping between NVMe PCIe SSD
drive letters, PCIe bus IDs, and 80 IDs in /sys/class/block/. See Figure 9-19.
Obtain the mapping between slot IDs and drive letters of NVMe PCIe SSDs according to the
mapping between slot IDs and bus IDs in Step 2. For example, drive letter nvme0n1 maps to
bus ID 0000:81:00.0 and 80 ID 0000:80:02.0. According to Step 2, drive letter nvme0n1
maps to slot ID 8.

Figure 9-19 Mapping between NVMe PCIe SSD drive letters, PCIe bus IDs, and 80 IDs

NOTE
In theory, the slot IDs queried in Step 1 are consistent with the slot IDs (8 to 11) marked on the server.
However, they may differ due to a system difference. If the slot IDs differ, obtain the required slot ID on the
server according to the value of dev.func ID (for example, dev.func ID of 0000:80:02.0 is 02.0) in the
mapping 80 ID in Step 3.

----End

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 281


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 10 How to Obtain Help

10 How to Obtain Help

About This Chapter

If a fault persists during routine maintenance or troubleshooting, contact Huawei technical


support.
10.1 Preparing to Contact Huawei Technical Support
10.2 Collecting Fault Information
10.3 Preparing for Debugging
10.4 Using Product Documentation
10.5 Obtaining Technical Support

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 282


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 10 How to Obtain Help

10.1 Preparing to Contact Huawei Technical Support


To rectify the fault, collect fault information and preparing for debugging before contacting
Huawei technical support.

10.2 Collecting Fault Information


Collect fault information before troubleshooting.

Collect the following information:


l Customer name and address
l Contact name and telephone number
l Time when the fault occurred
l Detailed fault symptom
l Device type and software version
l Measures taken after the fault occurred and results
l Fault severity and expected rectification deadline

10.3 Preparing for Debugging


When you contact Huawei for help, Huawei technical support may assist you in collecting
fault information or even rectifying the fault.

Before contacting Huawei technical support, prepare spare parts, screwdrivers, screws, serial
cables, network cables, and other necessary objects.

10.4 Using Product Documentation


Huawei provides product documentation shipped with the server. The product documentation
helps you rectify common faults that occur during routine maintenance or troubleshooting.

You are advised to read the documents carefully before you contact Huawei technical support.

10.5 Obtaining Technical Support


Huawei provides timely and efficient technical support through local branch offices, the
secondary technical support system, telephone technical support, remote technical support,
and onsite technical support.

Technical Support Website


See technical documents on the technical support website: http://e.huawei.com/us/

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 283


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide 10 How to Obtain Help

Self-Service Platform and Community


If you want to further learn server knowledge and communicate with experts, perform the
following operations:
l Visit HUAWEI Server Information Self-Service Platform to obtain server product
documentation.
l Visit Huawei Server Community for learning and discussion.

News
For notices about product life cycles, warnings, and rectifications, visit Product Bulletins.

Cases
You can learn server cases from Knowledge Base.

Huawei Technical Support


If a fault is difficult to locate or rectify during device maintenance or troubleshooting after
you refer to documents, contact Huawei technical support as follows:
l For enterprise customers, find the local contact information at Global Service Hotline.
For carriers, find the local contact information at Global TAC Information.
l Contact the technical support personnel of the local Huawei office.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 284


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide A Appendix

A Appendix

This topic describes the terms, acronyms, and abbreviations involved in this document.
A.1 Glossary
A.2 Acronyms and Abbreviations

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 285


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide A Appendix

A.1 Glossary
This topic defines the terms mentioned in this document.

BMC Baseboard management controller


The BMC complies with the Intelligent Platform Management Interface
(IPMI) standard, responsible for collecting, processing, and storing sensor
signals, and monitoring the operating status of each component. The BMC
provides the hardware status and alarm information about the managed
objects for the management module, so that the management module can
manage the objects.
ejector An item or part on the panel, used to insert or remove a blade in or out of a
lever slot.
Ethernet A baseband local area network (LAN) architecture developed by Xerox
Corporation in cooperation with DEC and Intel. Ethernet uses Carrier Sense
Multiple Access/Collision Detection (CSMA/CD) and supports a data
transfer rate of 10 Mbit/s on multiple cables. The Ethernet specification is the
basis for the IEEE 802.3 standard.
hot swap In a running system, insertion or removal of a blade or component does not
affect normal running of the system.
KVM Keyboard, video, and mouse
A switch that provides a public video, keyboard and mouse for all server
blades.
mezzanine A card connected to the mainboard through the connector, level to the
module mainboard. It is used on a device which has high requirement for space
usage.
P A unit of power. 1 P = 0.735 kW
panel The front-most element of a server, perpendicular to the PCB, which serves
to mount connectors, indicators, controls and mezzanines, and also seals the
front of the subrack for airflow and electromagnetic compatibility (EMC).
PCIe A high-speed serial computer expansion bus standard designed to replace the
older PCI, PCI-X, and AGP bus standards. PCIe has numerous
improvements over the aforementioned bus standards, including higher
maximum system bus throughput, lower I/O pin count and smaller physical
footprint, better performance-scaling for bus devices, a more detailed error
detection and reporting mechanism (Advanced Error Reporting), and native
hot-plug functionality. More recent revisions of the PCIe standard support
hardware I/O virtualization.
RAID Redundant array of independent disks
A storage technology that combines multiple hard disks into a logical unit in
several ways called "RAID levels", providing high storage and redundancy
performance.

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 286


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide A Appendix

redundanc The ability of a system to keep functioning normally in the event of a device
y failure by having a backup device automatically replace the faulty one.
SEL System event log
A non-volatile storage area and associated interfaces for storing system
platform events for later retrieval.
server A special computer that provides various services for clients over a network.
U A unit defined in International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) 60297-1
to measure the height of a cabinet, chassis, or subrack. 1 U = 44.45 mm =
1.75 in.

A.2 Acronyms and Abbreviations


This section describes the acronyms and abbreviations involved in this document.

A
AC alternating current

B
BIOS Basic Input/Output System
BMC Baseboard Management Controller

C
CD calendar day
CE Conformite Europende
CLI command-line interface

D
DC direct current
DDR4 Double Date Rate 4
DDDC Double Device Data Correction
DEMT Dynamic Energy Management Technology
DIMM dual in-line memory module
DRAM dynamic random access memory
DVD digital video disc

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 287


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide A Appendix

E
ECC Error Checking and Correcting
ECMA European Computer Manufacturer Association
EN European Efficiency

F
FC Fibre Channel
FCC Federal Communications Commission
FCoE Fibre Channel Over Ethernet
FTP File Transfer Protocol

G
GE Gigabit Ethernet
GPU Graphics Processing Unit

H
HA High Availability
HDD hard disk drive
HPC High Performance Computing
HTTP Hypertext Transfer Protocol
HTTPS Hypertext Transfer Protocol Secure

I
ICMP Internet Control Message Protocol
IDC Internet data center
IEC International Electrotechnical Commission
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
IGMP Internet Group Message Protocol
iBMC Integrated Baseboard Management Controller
IOPS input/output operations per second
IP Internet Protocol

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 288


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide A Appendix

IPC Intelligent Power Capability


IPMB Intelligent Platform Management Bus
IPMI Intelligent Platform Management Interface

K
KVM keyboard, video and mouse

L
LRDIMM load-reduced dual in-line memory module
LED light emitting diode
LOM LAN on motherboard

M
MAC Media Access Control
MMC Module Management Controller

N
NBD next business day
NC-SI Network Controller Sideband Interface

P
PCIe Peripheral Component Interconnect Express
PDU power distribution unit
PHY physical layer
PXE Preboot Execution Environment

Q
QPI QuickPath Interconnect

R
RAID redundant array of independent disks
RAS Reliability, Availability and Serviceability

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 289


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide A Appendix

RDIMM registered dual in-line memory module


REACH Registration Evaluation and Authorization of Chemicals
RJ45 Registered Jack 45
RoHS Restriction of the Use of Certain Hazardous Substances in
Electrical and Electronic Equipment

S
SAS Serial Attached Small Computer System Interface
SATA Serial Advanced Technology Attachment
SDDC Single Device Data Correction
SERDES Serializer/Deserializer
SMI Serial Management Interface
SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol
SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol
SOL Serial Over LAN
SSD solid-state drive

T
TCG Trusted Computing Group
TCO Total Cost of Ownership
TDP Thermal Design Power
TET Trusted Execution Technology
TFTP Trivial File Transfer Protocol
TOE TCP offload engine
TPM trusted platform module

U
UDIMM unbuffered dual in-line memory module
UEFI Unified Extensible Firmware Interface
UID unit identification light
UL Underwriter Laboratories Inc.
USB universal serial bus

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 290


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RH2288H V3 Server
User Guide A Appendix

V
VGA Video Graphics Array
VLAN virtual local area network

W
WEEE Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment
WSMAN Web Service Management

Issue 18 (2017-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 291


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Anda mungkin juga menyukai